]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
gdb/tui: Remove casts of NULL during assignment.
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
577a0623
AM
1004@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1005@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1006Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1007@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1008missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1010multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1011input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1012in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1013
252b5132
RH
1014@kindex -v
1015@kindex -V
1016@kindex --version
1017@cindex version
1018@item -v
1019@itemx --version
1020@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1021Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1022lists the supported emulations.
1023
1024@kindex -x
1025@kindex --discard-all
1026@cindex deleting local symbols
1027@item -x
1028@itemx --discard-all
1029Delete all local symbols.
1030
1031@kindex -X
1032@kindex --discard-locals
1033@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1034@item -X
252b5132 1035@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1036Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1037system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1038or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1039
1040@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1041@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1042@cindex symbol tracing
1043@item -y @var{symbol}
1044@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1045Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1046option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1047to prepend an underscore.
1048
1049This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1050don't know where the reference is coming from.
1051
1052@kindex -Y @var{path}
1053@item -Y @var{path}
1054Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1055for Solaris compatibility.
1056
1057@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1058@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1059The recognized keywords are:
1060@table @samp
1061
1062@item combreloc
1063Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1064lookup caching possible.
1065
1066@item defs
560e09e9 1067Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1068shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1069
6aa29e7b
JJ
1070@item execstack
1071Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1072
b039ef04
L
1073@item global
1074This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1075the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1076of subsequently loaded libraries.
1077
cd6d6c15
NC
1078@item initfirst
1079This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1080It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1081before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1082the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1083the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1084objects.
1085
1086@item interpose
1087Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1088but the primary executable.
1089
5fa222e4
AM
1090@item lazy
1091When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1092dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1093the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1094Lazy binding is the default.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@item loadfltr
1097Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1098runtime.
1099
1100@item muldefs
1101Allows multiple definitions.
1102
1103@item nocombreloc
1104Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1105
1106@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1107Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1108defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1109
1110@item nodefaultlib
1111Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1112ignore any default library search paths.
1113
1114@item nodelete
1115Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1116
1117@item nodlopen
1118Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1119
1120@item nodump
1121Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1122
6aa29e7b
JJ
1123@item noexecstack
1124Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1125
8dfef1bd
L
1126@item text
1127Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1128
1129@item notext
1130Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1131
1132@item textoff
1133Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1134
6aa29e7b
JJ
1135@item norelro
1136Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1137
cd6d6c15
NC
1138@item now
1139When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1140dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1141when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1142deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1143first called.
1144
1145@item origin
1146Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1147
6aa29e7b
JJ
1148@item relro
1149Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1150
24718e3b
L
1151@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1152Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1153
1154@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1155Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1156
04c3a755
NS
1157@item stack-size=@var{value}
1158Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1159Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1160@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1161
d258b828
IZ
1162@item bndplt
1163Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1164
889c2a67
L
1165@item noextern-protected-data
1166Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1167library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1168to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1169generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1170module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1171i386 and x86-64.
1172
cd6d6c15
NC
1173@end table
1174
ece2d90e 1175Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1176
1177@kindex -(
1178@cindex groups of archives
1179@item -( @var{archives} -)
1180@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1181The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1182either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1183
1184The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1185references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1186the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1187archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1188object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1189would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1190they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1191resolved.
1192
1193Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1194it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1195more archives.
1196
69da35b5
NC
1197@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1198@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1199@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1200@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1201Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1202recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1203and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1204the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1205behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1206so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1207restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1208
4a43e768
AM
1209@kindex --as-needed
1210@kindex --no-as-needed
1211@item --as-needed
1212@itemx --no-as-needed
1213This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1214on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1215the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1216on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1217needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1218emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1219non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1220the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1221non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1222Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1223the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1224needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1225from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1226
e56f61be
L
1227@kindex --add-needed
1228@kindex --no-add-needed
1229@item --add-needed
1230@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1231These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1232their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1233options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1234and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1235
252b5132
RH
1236@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1237@item -assert @var{keyword}
1238This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1239
1240@kindex -Bdynamic
1241@kindex -dy
1242@kindex -call_shared
1243@item -Bdynamic
1244@itemx -dy
1245@itemx -call_shared
1246Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1247for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1248default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1249for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1250multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1251@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1252
a1ab1d2a
UD
1253@kindex -Bgroup
1254@item -Bgroup
1255Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1256section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1257object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1258@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1259only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1260
252b5132
RH
1261@kindex -Bstatic
1262@kindex -dn
1263@kindex -non_shared
1264@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1265@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1266@itemx -dn
1267@itemx -non_shared
1268@itemx -static
1269Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1270platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1271variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1272may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1273library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1274option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1275option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1276shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1277references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1278libraries.
252b5132
RH
1279
1280@kindex -Bsymbolic
1281@item -Bsymbolic
1282When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1283definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1284for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1285within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1286platforms which support shared libraries.
1287
40b36307
L
1288@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1289@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1290When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1291symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1292This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1293libraries.
1294
55255dae
L
1295@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1296@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1297Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1298typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1299global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1300within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1301to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1302in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1303which support shared libraries.
1304
1305The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1306scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1307
40b36307
L
1308@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1309@item --dynamic-list-data
1310Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1311
1312@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1313@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1314Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1315is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1316
0b8a70d9
L
1317@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1318@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1319Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1320
252b5132
RH
1321@kindex --check-sections
1322@kindex --no-check-sections
1323@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1324@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1325Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1326been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1327perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1328suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1329allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1330restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1331Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1332force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1333option.
252b5132 1334
ddbb8a31
NC
1335@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1336@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1337@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1338@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1339This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1340by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1341command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1342output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1343input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1344specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1345follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1346behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1347
1348This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1349libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1350mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1351their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1352required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1353the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1354dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1355symbols.
1356
252b5132
RH
1357@cindex cross reference table
1358@kindex --cref
1359@item --cref
1360Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1361generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1362Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1363
1364The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1365easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1366sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1367symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1368definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1369where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1370symbol are listed.
252b5132 1371
4818e05f
AM
1372@cindex common allocation
1373@kindex --no-define-common
1374@item --no-define-common
1375This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1376The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1377@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1378
1379The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1380the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1381of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1382forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1383Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1384from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1385This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1386and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1387duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1388paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1389
252b5132 1390@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1391@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1392@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1393Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1394address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1395times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1396limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1397context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1398symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1399constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1400using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1401@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1402equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1403
1404@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1405@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1406@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1407@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1408@itemx --no-demangle
1409These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1410and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1411present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1412underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1413mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1414different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1415to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1416demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1417is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1418
1419@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1420@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1421@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1422@item -I@var{file}
1423@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1424Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1425generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1426linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1427doing.
1428
7ce691ae 1429@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1430@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1431@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1432@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1433Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1434with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1435
252b5132
RH
1436@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1437@item --force-exe-suffix
1438Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1439
1440If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1441@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1442the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1443option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1444Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1445it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1446
1447@kindex --gc-sections
1448@kindex --no-gc-sections
1449@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1450@item --gc-sections
1451@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1452Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1453targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1454performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1455@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1456collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1457implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1458
d5465ba2
AM
1459@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1460examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1461symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1462command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1463referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1464libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1465referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1466the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1467relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1468
ac69cbc6 1469This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1470@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1471specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1472a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1473
c17d87de
NC
1474@kindex --print-gc-sections
1475@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1476@cindex garbage collection
1477@item --print-gc-sections
1478@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1479List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1480printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1481collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1482default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1483be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1484line.
1485
30824704
RM
1486@kindex --print-output-format
1487@cindex output format
1488@item --print-output-format
1489Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1490other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1491in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1492
3604cb1f
TG
1493@kindex --print-memory-usage
1494@cindex memory usage
1495@item --print-memory-usage
1496Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1497the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1498quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1499headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1500parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1501
1502@smallexample
1503Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1504 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1505 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1506@end smallexample
1507
252b5132
RH
1508@cindex help
1509@cindex usage
1510@kindex --help
1511@item --help
1512Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1513
ea20a7da
CC
1514@kindex --target-help
1515@item --target-help
1516Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1517
2509a395
SL
1518@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1519@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1520Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1521@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1522
1523@cindex memory usage
1524@kindex --no-keep-memory
1525@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1526@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1527symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1528instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1529necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1530while linking a large executable.
1531
1532@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1533@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1534@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1535@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1536Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1537is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1538The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1539behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1540libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1541
aa713662
L
1542@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1543@kindex -z muldefs
1544@item --allow-multiple-definition
1545@itemx -z muldefs
1546Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1547report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1548first definition will be used.
1549
b79e8c78 1550@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1551@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1552@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1553@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1554Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1555This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1556determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1557shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1558how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1559
903249d7
NC
1560The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1561referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1562an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1563a shared library.
1564
1565The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1566libraries specified at link time are that:
1567
1568@itemize @bullet
1569@item
1570A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1571that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1572resolvable at load time.
1573@item
1574There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1575symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1576
1577The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1578select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1579architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1580appropriate memset function.
1581@end itemize
b79e8c78 1582
31941635
L
1583@kindex --no-undefined-version
1584@item --no-undefined-version
1585Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1586it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1587will be issued instead.
1588
3e3b46e5
PB
1589@kindex --default-symver
1590@item --default-symver
1591Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1592exported symbols.
1593
1594@kindex --default-imported-symver
1595@item --default-imported-symver
1596Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1597imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1598
252b5132
RH
1599@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1600@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1601Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1602files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1603been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1604This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1605errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1606have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1607inappropriate.
1608
fe7929ce
AM
1609@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1610@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1611Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1612library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1613
252b5132
RH
1614@kindex --no-whole-archive
1615@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1616Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1617archive files.
1618
1619@cindex output file after errors
1620@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1621@item --noinhibit-exec
1622Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1623Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1624errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1625when it issues any error whatsoever.
1626
0a9c1c8e
CD
1627@kindex -nostdlib
1628@item -nostdlib
1629Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1630command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1631(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1632
252b5132 1633@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1634@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1635@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1636@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1637file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1638@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1639object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1640object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1641should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1642usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1643name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1644list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1645command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1646this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1647@end ifclear
1648
36af4a4e
JJ
1649@kindex -pie
1650@kindex --pic-executable
1651@item -pie
1652@itemx --pic-executable
1653@cindex position independent executables
1654Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1655ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1656libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1657address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1658normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1659defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1660
252b5132
RH
1661@kindex -qmagic
1662@item -qmagic
1663This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1664
1665@kindex -Qy
1666@item -Qy
1667This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1668
1669@kindex --relax
1670@cindex synthesizing linker
1671@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1672@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1673@item --relax
28d5f677 1674@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1675An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1676@ifset GENERIC
1677This option is only supported on a few targets.
1678@end ifset
1679@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1680@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1681@end ifset
1682@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1683@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1684@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1685@ifset XTENSA
1686@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1687@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1688@ifset M68HC11
1689@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1690@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1691@ifset NIOSII
1692@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1693@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1694@ifset POWERPC
1695@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1696@end ifset
252b5132 1697
28d5f677
NC
1698On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1699global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1700addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1701synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1702instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1703
1704On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1705debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1706@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1707This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1708family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1709@end ifset
1710
1711@ifset GENERIC
1712On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1713but ignored.
1714@end ifset
1715
28d5f677
NC
1716On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1717@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1718
252b5132
RH
1719@cindex retaining specified symbols
1720@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1721@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1722@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1723@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1724Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1725discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1726symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1727@ifset GENERIC
1728(such as VxWorks)
1729@end ifset
1730where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1731run-time memory.
1732
1733@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1734or symbols needed for relocations.
1735
1736You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1737line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1738
1739@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1740@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1741@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1742@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1743Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1744linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1745arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1746them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1747also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1748objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1749@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1750ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1751@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1752
ff5dcc92 1753The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1754SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1755@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1756runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1757options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1758gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1759file systems.
252b5132 1760
ff5dcc92 1761For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1762followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1763the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1764@end ifset
1765
1766@ifset GENERIC
1767@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1768@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1769@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1770When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1771happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1772of the input files.
1773
1774When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1775non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1776shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1777explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1778specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1779@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1780either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1781appearing multiple times.
1782
28c309a2
NC
1783This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1784that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1785is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1786runtime linker would do.
1787
252b5132 1788The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1789libraries:
252b5132
RH
1790@enumerate
1791@item
ff5dcc92 1792Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1793@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1794Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1795between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1796specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1797used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1798at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1799by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1800the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1801@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1802On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1803@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1804environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1805@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1806On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1807directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1808@item
a1b8d843 1809For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1810variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1811@item
ec4eb78a
L
1812For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1813@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1814libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1815@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1816@item
252b5132
RH
1817The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1818@item
1819For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1820exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1821@end enumerate
1822
1823If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1824warning and continue with the link.
1825@end ifset
1826
1827@kindex -shared
1828@kindex -Bshareable
1829@item -shared
1830@itemx -Bshareable
1831@cindex shared libraries
1832Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1833and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1834shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1835undefined symbols in the link.
1836
252b5132 1837@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1838@item --sort-common
1839@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1840@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1841This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1842ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1843sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1844eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1845between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1846specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1847
2509a395
SL
1848@kindex --sort-section=name
1849@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1850This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1851patterns in the linker script.
1852
2509a395
SL
1853@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1854@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1855This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1856patterns in the linker script.
1857
252b5132 1858@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1859@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1860Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1861each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1862size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1863
1864@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1865@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1866Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1867output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1868This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1869certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1870cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1871that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1872support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1873input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1874more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1875many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1876
1877@kindex --stats
1878@item --stats
1879Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1880as execution time and memory usage.
1881
2509a395 1882@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1883@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1884Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1885configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1886that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1887
252b5132
RH
1888@kindex --traditional-format
1889@cindex traditional format
1890@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1891For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1892the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1893use the traditional format instead.
1894
1895@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1896For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1897symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1898full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1899@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1900trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1901combine duplicate entries.
1902
2509a395
SL
1903@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1904@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1905Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1906address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1907times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1908line.
1909@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1910for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1911@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1912should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1913sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1914
2509a395
SL
1915@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1916@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1917@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1918@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1919@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1920@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1921@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1922Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1923@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1924
2509a395
SL
1925@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1926@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1927@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1928When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1929byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1930
9d5777a3
RM
1931@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1932@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1933@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1934When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1935the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1936text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1937
0d705e9f
AM
1938@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1939@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1940@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1941When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1942model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1943
560e09e9
NC
1944@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1945@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1946Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1947values for @samp{method}:
1948
1949@table @samp
1950@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1951Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1952
1953@item report-all
da8bce14 1954Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1955
1956@item ignore-in-object-files
1957Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1958ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1959
1960@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1961Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1962ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1963when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1964libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1965command line.
1966@end table
1967
1968The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1969by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1970
1971Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1972unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1973can change this to a warning.
1974
1715a13c
L
1975@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1976@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1977@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1978@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1979Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1980supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1981the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1982argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1983
1984@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1985@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1986@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1987Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1988used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1989about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1990is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1991see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1992use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1993symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1994@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1995
7ce691ae 1996@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1997@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1998@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1999@item --warn-common
2000Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2001a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2002but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2003you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2004Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2005warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2006
2007There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2008
2009@table @samp
2010@item int i = 1;
2011A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2012file.
2013
2014@item extern int i;
2015An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2016There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2017variable somewhere.
2018
2019@item int i;
2020A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2021variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2022The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2023single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2024size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2025a definition of the same variable.
2026@end table
2027
2028The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2029Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2030just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2031encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2032a common symbol.
2033
2034@enumerate
2035@item
2036Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2037definition for the symbol.
2038@smallexample
2039@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2040 overridden by definition
2041@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2042@end smallexample
2043
2044@item
2045Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2046the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2047except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2048@smallexample
2049@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2050 overriding common
2051@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2052@end smallexample
2053
2054@item
2055Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2056@smallexample
2057@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2058 of `@var{symbol}'
2059@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2060@end smallexample
2061
2062@item
2063Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2064@smallexample
2065@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2066 overridden by larger common
2067@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2068@end smallexample
2069
2070@item
2071Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2072the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2073encountered in a different order.
2074@smallexample
2075@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2076 overriding smaller common
2077@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2078@end smallexample
2079@end enumerate
2080
2081@kindex --warn-constructors
2082@item --warn-constructors
2083Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2084object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2085detect the use of global constructors.
2086
2087@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2088@item --warn-multiple-gp
2089Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2090This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2091Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2092section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2093of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2094base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2095base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2096bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2097large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2098values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2099option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2100
2101@kindex --warn-once
2102@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2103@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2104@item --warn-once
2105Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2106which refers to it.
2107
3ea60775
NC
2108@kindex --warn-orphan
2109@kindex --no-warn-orphan
2110@cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2111@cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2112@item --warn-orphan
2113The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2114warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
1f0d470a 2115output file. @xref{Orphan Sections}. The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
3ea60775
NC
2116option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2117sections.
2118
252b5132
RH
2119@kindex --warn-section-align
2120@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2121@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2122@item --warn-section-align
2123Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2124alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2125The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2126is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2127the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2128
8fdd7217
NC
2129@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2130@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2131Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2132
a0c402a5
L
2133@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2134@item --warn-alternate-em
2135Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2136
560e09e9
NC
2137@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2138@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2139If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2140@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2141This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2142
2143@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2144@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2145This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2146it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2147
252b5132
RH
2148@kindex --whole-archive
2149@cindex including an entire archive
2150@item --whole-archive
2151For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2152@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2153in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2154files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2155library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2156library. This option may be used more than once.
2157
7ec229ce 2158Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2159about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2160Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2161list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2162your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2163
2509a395
SL
2164@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2165@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2166Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2167@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2168undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2169@var{symbol}.
2170
2171This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2172wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2173wishes to call the system function, it should call
2174@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2175
2176Here is a trivial example:
2177
2178@smallexample
2179void *
cc2f008e 2180__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2181@{
cc2f008e 2182 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2183 return __real_malloc (c);
2184@}
2185@end smallexample
2186
ff5dcc92 2187If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2188all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2189instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2190call the real @code{malloc} function.
2191
2192You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2193links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2194you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2195file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2196call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2197
6aa29e7b
JJ
2198@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2199@item --eh-frame-hdr
2200Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2201@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2202
e41b3a13
JJ
2203@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2204@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2205Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2206generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2207if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2208
6c1439be
L
2209@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2210@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2211@item --enable-new-dtags
2212@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2213This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2214systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2215@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2216and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2217If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2218created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2219those options are only available for ELF systems.
2220
2d643429 2221@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2222@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2223Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2224close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2225time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2226increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2227value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2228
fdc90cb4
JJ
2229@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2230@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2231Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2232@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2233new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2234the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2235hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2236
0ce398f1
L
2237@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2238@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2239@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2240@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2241@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2242@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2243@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2244@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2245On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2246compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2247compress DWARF debug sections.
2248@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2249sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2250instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2251and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2252compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
0ce398f1 2253
35835446
JR
2254@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2255@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2256This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2257linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2258for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2259about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2260
4f9c04f7 2261Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22621021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2263run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2264has been used.
2265
2266The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2267enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2268
c0065db7
RM
2269@kindex --build-id
2270@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2271@item --build-id
2272@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2273Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2274or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2275unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2276@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2277@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2278@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2279the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2280string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2281@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2282is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2283
2284The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2285that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2286unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2287to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2288file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2289string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2290
2291Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2292@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2293@end table
2294
0285c67d
NC
2295@c man end
2296
36f63dca 2297@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2298
0285c67d
NC
2299@c man begin OPTIONS
2300
ff5dcc92 2301The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2302the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2303normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2304use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2305@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2306like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2307symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2308object file).
2309
2310In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2311support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2312PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2313values by either a space or an equals sign.
2314
ff5dcc92 2315@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2316
2317@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2318@item --add-stdcall-alias
2319If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2320as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2321[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2322
2323@kindex --base-file
2324@item --base-file @var{file}
2325Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2326addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2327@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2328[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@kindex --dll
2331@item --dll
2332Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2333@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2334file.
bb10df36 2335[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2336
88183869
DK
2337@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2338@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2339@item --enable-long-section-names
2340@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2341The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2342the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2343for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2344fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2345to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2346allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2347disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2348generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2349as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2350with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2351GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2352information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2353option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2354section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2355when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2356image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2357[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2358
252b5132
RH
2359@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2360@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2361@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2362@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2363If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2364do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2365only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2366resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2367undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2368@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2369to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2370warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2371import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2372to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2373feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2374@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2375mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2377
522f09cd
KT
2378@kindex --leading-underscore
2379@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2380@item --leading-underscore
2381@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2382For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2383in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2384disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2385
252b5132
RH
2386@cindex DLLs, creating
2387@kindex --export-all-symbols
2388@item --export-all-symbols
2389If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2390be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2391otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2392explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2393attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2394option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2395@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2396@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2397exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2398re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2399such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2400@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2401@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2402Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2403not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2404extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2405(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2406These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2407@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2408@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2409@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2410@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2411[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2412
2413@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2414@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2415Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2416exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2417[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2418
2927aaca
NC
2419@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2420@item --exclude-all-symbols
2421Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2422[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2423
252b5132
RH
2424@kindex --file-alignment
2425@item --file-alignment
2426Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2427file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2428512.
bb10df36 2429[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2430
2431@cindex heap size
2432@kindex --heap
2433@item --heap @var{reserve}
2434@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2435Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2436to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2437committed.
bb10df36 2438[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2439
2440@cindex image base
2441@kindex --image-base
2442@item --image-base @var{value}
2443Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2444the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2445is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2446your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2447other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2448for dlls.
bb10df36 2449[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2450
2451@kindex --kill-at
2452@item --kill-at
2453If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2454symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2455[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2456
26d2d8a2
BF
2457@kindex --large-address-aware
2458@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2459If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2460header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2461greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2462or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2463section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2464[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2465
f69a2f97
NC
2466@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2467@item --disable-large-address-aware
2468Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2469This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2470driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2471addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2472[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2473
252b5132
RH
2474@kindex --major-image-version
2475@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2476Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2477[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2478
2479@kindex --major-os-version
2480@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2481Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2482[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2483
2484@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2485@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2486Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2487[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2488
2489@kindex --minor-image-version
2490@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2491Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2492[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2493
2494@kindex --minor-os-version
2495@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2496Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2497[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2498
2499@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2500@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2501Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2503
2504@cindex DEF files, creating
2505@cindex DLLs, creating
2506@kindex --output-def
2507@item --output-def @var{file}
2508The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2509file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2510(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2511library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2512automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2513[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2514
b044cda1
CW
2515@cindex DLLs, creating
2516@kindex --out-implib
2517@item --out-implib @var{file}
2518The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2519import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2520import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2521may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2522makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2523creation step.
bb10df36 2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2525
2526@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2527@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2528@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2529Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2530@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2531By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2532for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2533execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2534[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2535
2536@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2537@item --disable-auto-image-base
2538Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2539user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2540default.
bb10df36 2541[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2542
2543@cindex DLLs, linking to
2544@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2545@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2546When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2547search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2548@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2549between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2550uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2551@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2552[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2553
2554@kindex --enable-auto-import
2555@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2556Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2557DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2558building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2559'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2560to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2561specification published by Microsoft.
2562
e2a83dd0
NC
2563Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2564data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2565placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2566around a problem with consts that is described here:
2567http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2568
4d8907ac
DS
2569Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2570see this message:
0d888aac 2571
ece2d90e 2572"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2573documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2574
ece2d90e
NC
2575This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2576ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2577allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2578fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2579constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2580multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2581this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2582of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2583the warning, and exit.
2584
2585There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2586data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2587
2fa9fc65
NC
2588One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2589of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2590this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2591
c0065db7
RM
2592A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2593that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2594there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2595a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2596
2597@example
2598extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2599extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2600 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2601@end example
2602
2603or
2604
2605@example
2606extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2607extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2608 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2609@end example
2610
c0065db7 2611For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2612is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2613
2614@example
2615extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2616extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2617 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2618@end example
2619
c406afaf
NC
2620or
2621
2622@example
2623extern long long extern_ll;
2624extern_ll -->
2625 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2626@end example
2627
2fa9fc65 2628A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2629'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2630@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2631requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2632building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2633merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2634between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2635constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2636
2637Original:
2638@example
2639--foo.h
2640extern int arr[];
2641--foo.c
2642#include "foo.h"
2643void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2644 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2645@}
2646@end example
2647
2648Solution 1:
2649@example
2650--foo.h
2651extern int arr[];
2652--foo.c
2653#include "foo.h"
2654void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2655 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2656 volatile int *parr = arr;
2657 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2658@}
2659@end example
2660
2661Solution 2:
2662@example
2663--foo.h
2664/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2665#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2666 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2667#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2668#else
2669#define FOO_IMPORT
2670#endif
2671extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2672--foo.c
2673#include "foo.h"
2674void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2675 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2676@}
2677@end example
2678
c0065db7 2679A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2680library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2681for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2682functions).
bb10df36 2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2684
2685@kindex --disable-auto-import
2686@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2687Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2688@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2689[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2690
2fa9fc65
NC
2691@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2692@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2693If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2694that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2695a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2696environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2697[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2698
2699@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2700@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2701Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2702DLLs.
bb10df36 2703[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2704
b044cda1
CW
2705@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2706@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2707Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2708[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2709
252b5132
RH
2710@kindex --section-alignment
2711@item --section-alignment
2712Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2713addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2714[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2715
2716@cindex stack size
2717@kindex --stack
2718@item --stack @var{reserve}
2719@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2720Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2721to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2722committed.
bb10df36 2723[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2724
2725@kindex --subsystem
2726@item --subsystem @var{which}
2727@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2728@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2729Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2730legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2731@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2732the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2733@var{which}.
bb10df36 2734[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2735
2f563b51
DK
2736The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2737of the PE file header:
2738[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2739
2d5c3743
NC
2740@kindex --high-entropy-va
2741@item --high-entropy-va
2742Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2743(ASLR).
2744
2f563b51
DK
2745@kindex --dynamicbase
2746@item --dynamicbase
2747The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2748randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2749Vista for i386 PE targets.
2750
2751@kindex --forceinteg
2752@item --forceinteg
2753Code integrity checks are enforced.
2754
2755@kindex --nxcompat
2756@item --nxcompat
2757The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2758This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2759
2760@kindex --no-isolation
2761@item --no-isolation
2762Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2763
2764@kindex --no-seh
2765@item --no-seh
2766The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2767this image.
2768
2769@kindex --no-bind
2770@item --no-bind
2771Do not bind this image.
2772
2773@kindex --wdmdriver
2774@item --wdmdriver
2775The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2776
2f563b51
DK
2777@kindex --tsaware
2778@item --tsaware
2779The image is Terminal Server aware.
2780
0cb112f7
CF
2781@kindex --insert-timestamp
2782@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2783@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2784Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2785as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2786other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2787will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2788same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2789can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2790that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2791identically.
252b5132
RH
2792@end table
2793
0285c67d
NC
2794@c man end
2795
ac145307
BS
2796@ifset C6X
2797@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2798
2799@c man begin OPTIONS
2800
2801The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2802libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2803all executables use an index of 0.
2804
2805@table @gcctabopt
2806
2807@kindex --dsbt-size
2808@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2809This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2810or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2811entries.
2812
2813@kindex --dsbt-index
2814@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2815This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2816to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2817executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2818@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2819
fbd9ad90
PB
2820@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2821The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2822exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2823
ac145307
BS
2824@end table
2825
2826@c man end
2827@end ifset
2828
93fd0973
SC
2829@ifset M68HC11
2830@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2831
2832@c man begin OPTIONS
2833
2834The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2835memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2836
2837@table @gcctabopt
2838
2839@kindex --no-trampoline
2840@item --no-trampoline
2841This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2842is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2843instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2844
2845@kindex --bank-window
2846@item --bank-window @var{name}
2847This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2848the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2849The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2850paging and addresses within the memory window.
2851
2852@end table
2853
2854@c man end
2855@end ifset
2856
7fb9f789
NC
2857@ifset M68K
2858@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2859
2860@c man begin OPTIONS
2861
2862The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2863when linking for 68K targets.
2864
2865@table @gcctabopt
2866
2867@kindex --got
2868@item --got=@var{type}
2869This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2870@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2871@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2872Info entry for @file{ld}.
2873
2874@end table
2875
2876@c man end
2877@end ifset
2878
833794fc
MR
2879@ifset MIPS
2880@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2881
2882@c man begin OPTIONS
2883
2884The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2885generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2886
2887@table @gcctabopt
2888
2889@kindex --insn32
2890@item --insn32
2891@kindex --no-insn32
2892@itemx --no-insn32
2893These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2894generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2895or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
289632-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2897used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2898possible.
2899
2900@end table
2901
2902@c man end
2903@end ifset
2904
252b5132
RH
2905@ifset UsesEnvVars
2906@node Environment
2907@section Environment Variables
2908
0285c67d
NC
2909@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2910
560e09e9 2911You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2912@ifclear SingleFormat
2913@code{GNUTARGET},
2914@end ifclear
2915@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2916
36f63dca 2917@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2918@kindex GNUTARGET
2919@cindex default input format
2920@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2921use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2922of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2923@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2924of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2925attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2926this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2927there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2928object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2929BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2930in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2931@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2932
2933@kindex LDEMULATION
2934@cindex default emulation
2935@cindex emulation, default
2936@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2937@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2938behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2939available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2940the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2941variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2942linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2943
2944@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2945@cindex demangling, default
2946Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2947@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2948default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2949a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2950may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2951options.
2952
0285c67d
NC
2953@c man end
2954@end ifset
2955
252b5132
RH
2956@node Scripts
2957@chapter Linker Scripts
2958
2959@cindex scripts
2960@cindex linker scripts
2961@cindex command files
2962Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2963written in the linker command language.
2964
2965The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2966the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2967the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2968more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2969direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2970described below.
2971
2972The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2973yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2974linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2975to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2976such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2977
2978You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2979line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2980default linker script.
2981
2982You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2983to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2984Linker Scripts}.
2985
2986@menu
2987* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2988* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2989* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2990* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2991* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2992* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2993* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2994* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2995* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2996* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2997* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2998@end menu
2999
3000@node Basic Script Concepts
3001@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3002@cindex linker script concepts
3003We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3004describe the linker script language.
3005
3006The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3007file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3008@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3009The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3010purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3011among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3012section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3013in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3014
3015Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3016also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3017contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3018the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3019A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3020area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3021loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3022which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3023of debugging information.
3024
3025Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3026first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3027the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3028@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3029section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3030same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3031is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3032(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3033based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3034RAM address would be the VMA.
3035
3036You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3037program with the @samp{-h} option.
3038
3039Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3040@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3041has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3042information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3043will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3044static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3045referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3046
3047You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3048program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3049option.
3050
3051@node Script Format
3052@section Linker Script Format
3053@cindex linker script format
3054Linker scripts are text files.
3055
3056You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3057either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3058symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3059generally ignored.
3060
3061Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3062If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3063otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3064double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3065file name.
3066
3067You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3068@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3069to whitespace.
3070
3071@node Simple Example
3072@section Simple Linker Script Example
3073@cindex linker script example
3074@cindex example of linker script
3075Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3076
3077The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3078@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3079memory layout of the output file.
3080
3081The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3082describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3083code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3084@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3085Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3086your input files.
3087
3088For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30890x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3090linker script which will do that:
3091@smallexample
3092SECTIONS
3093@{
3094 . = 0x10000;
3095 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3096 . = 0x8000000;
3097 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3098 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3099@}
3100@end smallexample
3101
3102You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3103followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3104descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3105
252b5132
RH
3106The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3107sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3108counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3109other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3110current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3111incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3112@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3113
3114The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3115required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3116after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3117which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3118wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3119means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3120
3121Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3122@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3123@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3124
3125The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3126the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3127at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3128output section, the value of the location counter will be
3129@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3130effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3131immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3132
3133The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3134alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3135example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3136sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3137may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3138sections.
3139
3140That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3141
3142@node Simple Commands
3143@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3144@cindex linker script simple commands
3145In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3146
3147@menu
3148* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3149* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3150@ifclear SingleFormat
3151* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3152@end ifclear
3153
4a93e180 3154* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3155* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3156@end menu
3157
3158@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3159@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3160@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3161@cindex start of execution
3162@cindex first instruction
3163@cindex entry point
3164The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3165point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3166entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3167@smallexample
3168ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3169@end smallexample
3170
3171There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3172entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3173stopping when one of them succeeds:
3174@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3175@item
252b5132 3176the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3177@item
252b5132 3178the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3179@item
3ab904c4
NC
3180the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3181targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3182check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3183@item
252b5132 3184the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3185@item
252b5132
RH
3186The address @code{0}.
3187@end itemize
3188
3189@node File Commands
36f63dca 3190@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3191@cindex linker script file commands
3192Several linker script commands deal with files.
3193
3194@table @code
3195@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3196@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3197@cindex including a linker script
3198Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3199be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3200with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
320110 levels deep.
3202
4006703d
NS
3203You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3204@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3205
252b5132
RH
3206@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3207@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3208@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3209@cindex input files in linker scripts
3210@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3211@cindex linker script input object files
3212The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3213in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3214
3215For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3216a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3217then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3218
3219In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3220script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3221
e3f2db7f
AO
3222In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3223with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3224located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3225for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3226open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3227linker will search through the archive library search path.
3228The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3229as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3230description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3231
ff5dcc92 3232If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3233name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3234@samp{-l}.
3235
3236When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3237files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3238script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3239
3240@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3241@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3242@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3243@cindex grouping input files
3244The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3245files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3246new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3247in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3248
b717d30e
JJ
3249@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3250@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3251@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3252This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3253commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3254as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3255with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3256when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3257@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3258and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3259setting afterwards.
3260
252b5132
RH
3261@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3262@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3263@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3264The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3265@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3266@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3267Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3268precedence.
3269
3270You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3271output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3272
3273@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3274@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3275@cindex library search path in linker script
3276@cindex archive search path in linker script
3277@cindex search path in linker script
3278The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3279@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3280@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3281on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3282are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3283the command line option are searched first.
3284
3285@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3286@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3287@cindex first input file
3288The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3289that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3290though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3291when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3292first file.
3293@end table
3294
3295@ifclear SingleFormat
3296@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3297@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3298A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3299
3300@table @code
3301@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3302@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3303@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3304@cindex output file format in linker script
3305The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3306output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3307exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3308(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3309line option takes precedence.
3310
3311You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3312formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3313This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3314desired endianness.
3315
3316If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3317will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3318output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3319used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3320
3321For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3322command:
3323@smallexample
3324OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3325@end smallexample
3326This says that the default format for the output file is
3327@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3328option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3329format.
3330
3331@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3332@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3333@cindex input file format in linker script
3334The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3335files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3336This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3337(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3338is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3339command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3340@end table
3341@end ifclear
3342
4a93e180
NC
3343@node REGION_ALIAS
3344@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3345@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3346@cindex region alias
3347@cindex region names
3348
3349Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3350@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3351
3352@smallexample
3353REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3354@end smallexample
3355
3356The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3357memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3358to memory regions. An example follows.
3359
3360Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3361memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3362that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3363non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3364access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3365read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3366sections:
3367
3368@itemize @bullet
3369@item
3370@code{.text} program code;
3371@item
3372@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3373@item
3374@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3375@item
3376@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3377@end itemize
3378
3379The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3380part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3381output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3382systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3383@code{C}:
3384@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3385@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3386@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3387@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3388@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3389@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3390@end multitable
3391The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3392loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3393the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3394the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3395
3396The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3397includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3398memory layout:
3399@smallexample
3400INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3401
3402SECTIONS
3403 @{
3404 .text :
3405 @{
3406 *(.text)
3407 @} > REGION_TEXT
3408 .rodata :
3409 @{
3410 *(.rodata)
3411 rodata_end = .;
3412 @} > REGION_RODATA
3413 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3414 @{
3415 data_start = .;
3416 *(.data)
3417 @} > REGION_DATA
3418 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3419 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3420 .bss :
3421 @{
3422 *(.bss)
3423 @} > REGION_BSS
3424 @}
3425@end smallexample
3426
3427Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3428regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3429variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3430@table @code
3431@item A
3432Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3433@smallexample
3434MEMORY
3435 @{
3436 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3437 @}
3438
3439REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3440REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3441REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3442REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3443@end smallexample
3444@item B
3445Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3446into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3447@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3448@smallexample
3449MEMORY
3450 @{
3451 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3452 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3453 @}
3454
3455REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3456REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3457REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3458REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3459@end smallexample
3460@item C
3461Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3462@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3463initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3464system start into the @code{RAM}.
3465@smallexample
3466MEMORY
3467 @{
3468 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3469 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3470 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3471 @}
3472
3473REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3474REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3475REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3476REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3477@end smallexample
3478@end table
3479
3480It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3481@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3482necessary:
3483@smallexample
3484#include <string.h>
3485
3486extern char data_start [];
3487extern char data_size [];
3488extern char data_load_start [];
3489
3490void copy_data(void)
3491@{
3492 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3493 @{
3494 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3495 @}
3496@}
3497@end smallexample
3498
252b5132 3499@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3500@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3501There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3502
3503@table @code
3504@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3505@kindex ASSERT
3506@cindex assertion in linker script
3507Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3508with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3509
fd1c4238
NC
3510Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3511take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3512inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3513for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3514symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3515
3516@smallexample
3517 .stack :
3518 @{
3519 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3520 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3521 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3522 @}
3523@end smallexample
3524
3525will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3526PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3527can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3528
3529@smallexample
3530 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3531 .stack :
3532 @{
3533 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3534 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3535 @}
3536@end smallexample
3537
3538will work.
3539
252b5132
RH
3540@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3541@kindex EXTERN
3542@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3543Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3544symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3545modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3546each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3547command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3548
3549@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3550@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3551@cindex common allocation in linker script
3552This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3553to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3554output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3555
4818e05f
AM
3556@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3557@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3558@cindex common allocation in linker script
3559This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3560command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3561to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3562
53d25da6
AM
3563@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3564@kindex INSERT
3565@cindex insert user script into default script
3566This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3567augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3568inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3569@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3570default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3571sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3572linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3573insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3574linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3575default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3576of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3577to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3578is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3579
3580@smallexample
3581SECTIONS
3582@{
3583 OVERLAY :
3584 @{
3585 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3586 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3587 @}
3588@}
3589INSERT AFTER .text;
3590@end smallexample
3591
252b5132
RH
3592@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3593@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3594@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3595This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3596references among certain output sections.
3597
3598In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3599using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3600will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3601errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3602a function defined in the other section.
3603
3604The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3605@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3606an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3607@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3608names.
3609
3610@ifclear SingleFormat
3611@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3612@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3613@cindex machine architecture
3614@cindex architecture
3615Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3616of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3617architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3618the @samp{-f} option.
3619@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3620
3621@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3622@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3623This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3624@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3625in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3626@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3627@end table
3628
3629@node Assignments
3630@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3631@cindex assignment in scripts
3632@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3633@cindex variables, defining
3634You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3635the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3636
3637@menu
3638* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3639* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3640* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3641* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3642* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3643@end menu
3644
3645@node Simple Assignments
3646@subsection Simple Assignments
3647
3648You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3649
3650@table @code
3651@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3652@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3653@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3654@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3655@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3656@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3657@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3658@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3659@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3660@end table
3661
3662The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3663@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3664defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3665
3666The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3667may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3668
3669The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3670
3671Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3672
3673You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3674statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3675section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3676
3677The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3678expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3679
3680Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3681assignments may be used:
3682
3683@smallexample
3684floating_point = 0;
3685SECTIONS
3686@{
3687 .text :
3688 @{
3689 *(.text)
3690 _etext = .;
3691 @}
156e34dd 3692 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3693 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3694@}
3695@end smallexample
3696@noindent
3697In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3698zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3699the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3700defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3701upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3702
eb8476a6
MR
3703@node HIDDEN
3704@subsection HIDDEN
3705@cindex HIDDEN
3706For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3707exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3708
3709Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3710@code{HIDDEN}:
3711
3712@smallexample
3713HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3714SECTIONS
3715@{
3716 .text :
3717 @{
3718 *(.text)
3719 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3720 @}
3721 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3722 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3723@}
3724@end smallexample
3725@noindent
3726In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3727
252b5132
RH
3728@node PROVIDE
3729@subsection PROVIDE
3730@cindex PROVIDE
3731In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3732only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3733the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3734@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3735@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3736@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3737@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3738@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3739
3740Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3741@smallexample
3742SECTIONS
3743@{
3744 .text :
3745 @{
3746 *(.text)
3747 _etext = .;
3748 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3749 @}
3750@}
3751@end smallexample
3752
3753In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3754underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3755the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3756underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3757If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3758linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3759
7af8e998
L
3760@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3761@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3762@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3763Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3764hidden and won't be exported.
3765
73ae6183
NC
3766@node Source Code Reference
3767@subsection Source Code Reference
3768
3769Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3770intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3771a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3772symbol that does not have a value.
3773
3774Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3775transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3776stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3777prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3778mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3779of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3780variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3781linker script variable might be referred to as:
3782
3783@smallexample
3784 extern int foo;
3785@end smallexample
3786
3787But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3788
3789@smallexample
3790 _foo = 1000;
3791@end smallexample
3792
3793In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3794transformation has taken place.
3795
3796When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3797things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3798in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3799second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3800table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3801contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3802value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3803
3804@smallexample
3805 int foo = 1000;
3806@end smallexample
3807
10bf6894 3808creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3809holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3810number 1000 is initially stored.
3811
3812When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3813first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3814memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3815So:
3816
3817@smallexample
3818 foo = 1;
3819@end smallexample
3820
3821looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3822associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3823address. Whereas:
3824
3825@smallexample
3826 int * a = & foo;
3827@end smallexample
3828
10bf6894 3829looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3830and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3831the variable @samp{a}.
3832
3833Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3834the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3835an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3836
3837@smallexample
3838 foo = 1000;
3839@end smallexample
3840
3841creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3842the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3843address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3844linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3845access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3846
3847Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3848you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3849use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3850section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3851linker script contains these declarations:
3852
3853@smallexample
3854@group
3855 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3856 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3857 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3858@end group
3859@end smallexample
3860
3861Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3862
3863@smallexample
3864@group
3865 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3866
73ae6183
NC
3867 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3868@end group
3869@end smallexample
3870
3871Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3872
252b5132 3873@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3874@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3875@kindex SECTIONS
3876The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3877into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3878
3879The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3880@smallexample
3881SECTIONS
3882@{
3883 @var{sections-command}
3884 @var{sections-command}
3885 @dots{}
3886@}
3887@end smallexample
3888
3889Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3890
3891@itemize @bullet
3892@item
3893an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3894@item
3895a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3896@item
3897an output section description
3898@item
3899an overlay description
3900@end itemize
3901
3902The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3903@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3904those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3905understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3906the layout of the output file.
3907
3908Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3909below.
3910
3911If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3912linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3913section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3914input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3915example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3916in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3917
3918@menu
3919* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3920* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3921* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3922* Input Section:: Input section description
3923* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3924* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3925* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3926* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3927* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3928@end menu
3929
3930@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3931@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3932The full description of an output section looks like this:
3933@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3934@group
7e7d5768 3935@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3936 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3937 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3938 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3939 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3940 @{
3941 @var{output-section-command}
3942 @var{output-section-command}
3943 @dots{}
abc9061b 3944 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3945@end group
3946@end smallexample
3947
3948Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3949
3950The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3951name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3952The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3953the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3954The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3955
3956Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3957
3958@itemize @bullet
3959@item
3960a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3961@item
3962an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3963@item
3964data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3965@item
3966a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3967@end itemize
3968
3969@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3970@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3971@cindex name, section
3972@cindex section name
3973The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3974meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3975support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3976must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3977example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3978output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3979names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3980quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3981characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3982commas must be quoted.
3983
3984The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3985Discarding}.
3986
3987@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3988@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3989@cindex address, section
3990@cindex section address
3991The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3992address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3993is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3994
3995If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3996section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3997to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3998alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3999contained within the output section.
4000
4001The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4002
4003@itemize @bullet
4004@item
4005If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4006is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4007in that region.
4008
4009@item
4010If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4011regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4012section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4013be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4014
4015@item
4016If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4017the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4018counter.
4019@end itemize
4020
4021@noindent
4022For example:
4023
252b5132
RH
4024@smallexample
4025.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4026@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4027
252b5132
RH
4028@noindent
4029and
ea5cae92 4030
252b5132
RH
4031@smallexample
4032.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4033@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4034
252b5132
RH
4035@noindent
4036are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4037@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4038counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4039counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4040input sections.
252b5132
RH
4041
4042The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4043For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4044so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4045do something like this:
4046@smallexample
4047.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4048@end smallexample
4049@noindent
4050This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4051aligned upward to the specified value.
4052
4053Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4054location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4055sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4056
4057@node Input Section
36f63dca 4058@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4059@cindex input sections
4060@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4061The most common output section command is an input section description.
4062
4063The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4064You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4065in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4066map the input files into your memory layout.
4067
4068@menu
4069* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4070* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4071* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4072* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4073* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4074@end menu
4075
4076@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4077@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4078@cindex input section basics
4079An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4080by a list of section names in parentheses.
4081
4082The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4083describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4084
4085The most common input section description is to include all input
4086sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4087include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4088@smallexample
4089*(.text)
4090@end smallexample
4091@noindent
18625d54
CM
4092Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4093of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4094match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4095example:
252b5132 4096@smallexample
b4346c09 4097*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4098@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4099will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4100@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4101
4102There are two ways to include more than one section:
4103@smallexample
4104*(.text .rdata)
4105*(.text) *(.rdata)
4106@end smallexample
4107@noindent
4108The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4109@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4110first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4111they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4112@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4113@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4114
4115You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4116You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4117needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4118@smallexample
4119data.o(.data)
4120@end smallexample
4121
ae17ab41
CM
4122To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4123of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4124
4125Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4126
4127@smallexample
4128@group
4129SECTIONS @{
4130 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4131 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4132@}
4133@end group
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4137input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4138@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4139@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4140whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4141
967928e9
AM
4142You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4143matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4144with no whitespace around the colon.
4145
4146@table @samp
4147@item archive:file
4148matches file within archive
4149@item archive:
4150matches the whole archive
4151@item :file
4152matches file but not one in an archive
4153@end table
4154
4155Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4156wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4157single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4158@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4159within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4160also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4161other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4162from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4163command.
4164
252b5132
RH
4165If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4166the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4167commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4168@smallexample
4169data.o
4170@end smallexample
4171
967928e9
AM
4172When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4173and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4174characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4175name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4176did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4177though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4178@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4179the archive search path.
4180
4181@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4182@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4183@cindex input section wildcards
4184@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4185@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4186@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4187In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4188name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4189
4190The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4191pattern for the file name.
4192
4193The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4194
4195@table @samp
4196@item *
4197matches any number of characters
4198@item ?
4199matches any single character
4200@item [@var{chars}]
4201matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4202character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4203@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4204@item \
4205quotes the following character
4206@end table
4207
4208When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4209will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4210Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4211exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4212@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4213a @samp{/} character.
4214
4215File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4216specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4217does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4218
4219If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4220appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4221will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4222sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4223@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4224@smallexample
4225.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4226.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4227@end smallexample
4228
bcaa7b3e 4229@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4230Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4231in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4232this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4233pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4234@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4235into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4236
bcaa7b3e
L
4237@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4238@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4239difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4240descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4241Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4242reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4243
02ecc8e9
L
4244@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4245@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4246difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4247ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4248encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4249
bcaa7b3e
L
4250@cindex SORT
4251@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4252
4253When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4254can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4255
4256@enumerate
4257@item
4258@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4259It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4260sections have the same name.
4261@item
4262@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4263It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4264sections have the same alignment.
4265@item
c0065db7 4266@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4267treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4268@item
4269@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4270is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4271@item
4272All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4273@end enumerate
4274
4275When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4276section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4277takes precedence over the command line option.
4278
4279If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4280command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4281treated as nested sorting command.
4282
4283@enumerate
4284@item
4285@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4286@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4287@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4288@item
4289@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4290@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4291@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4292@end enumerate
4293
4294If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4295command line option will be ignored.
4296
eda680f8
L
4297@cindex SORT_NONE
4298@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4299section sorting option.
4300
252b5132
RH
4301If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4302@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4303precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4304
4305This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4306files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4307sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4308The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4309with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4310linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4311@smallexample
4312@group
4313SECTIONS @{
4314 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4315 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4316 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4317 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4318@}
4319@end group
4320@end smallexample
4321
4322@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4323@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4324@cindex common symbol placement
4325@cindex uninitialized data placement
4326A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4327file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4328linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4329named @samp{COMMON}.
4330
4331You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4332other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4333particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4334input files are placed in another section.
4335
4336In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4337@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4338@smallexample
4339.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4340@end smallexample
4341
4342@cindex scommon section
4343@cindex small common symbols
4344Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4345example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4346symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4347different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4348the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4349symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4350to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4351locations.
4352
4353@cindex [COMMON]
4354You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4355notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4356@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4357
4358@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4359@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4360@cindex KEEP
4361@cindex garbage collection
4362When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4363it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4364This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4365with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4366@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4367
4368@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4369@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4370The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4371to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4372start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4373@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4374follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4375@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4376@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4377All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4378files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4379
4380@smallexample
4381@group
4382SECTIONS @{
4383 outputa 0x10000 :
4384 @{
4385 all.o
4386 foo.o (.input1)
4387 @}
36f63dca
NC
4388@end group
4389@group
252b5132
RH
4390 outputb :
4391 @{
4392 foo.o (.input2)
4393 foo1.o (.input1)
4394 @}
36f63dca
NC
4395@end group
4396@group
252b5132
RH
4397 outputc :
4398 @{
4399 *(.input1)
4400 *(.input2)
4401 @}
4402@}
4403@end group
a1ab1d2a 4404@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4405
4406@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4407@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4408@cindex data
4409@cindex section data
4410@cindex output section data
4411@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4412@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4413@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4414@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4415@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4416You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4417@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4418an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4419parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4420value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4421counter.
4422
4423The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4424store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4425bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4426stored.
4427
4428For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4429of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4430@smallexample
4431BYTE(1)
4432LONG(addr)
4433@end smallexample
4434
4435When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4436same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4437target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4438@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4439@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4440
4441If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4442which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4443When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4444true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4445endianness of the first input object file.
4446
36f63dca 4447Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4448between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4449@smallexample
4450SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4451@end smallexample
4452whereas this will work:
4453@smallexample
4454SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4455@end smallexample
4456
252b5132
RH
4457@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4458@cindex holes, filling
4459@cindex unspecified memory
4460You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4461current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4462otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4463gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4464with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4465necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4466point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4467than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4468different parts of an output section.
4469
4470This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4471value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4472@smallexample
563e308f 4473FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4474@end smallexample
4475
4476The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4477section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4478part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4479entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4480precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4481expression.
252b5132
RH
4482
4483@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4484@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4485There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4486commands.
4487
4488@table @code
4489@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4490@cindex input filename symbols
4491@cindex filename symbols
4492@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4493The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4494The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4495file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4496the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4497
4498This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4499normally used for any other object file format.
4500
4501@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4502@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4503@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4504@item CONSTRUCTORS
4505When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4506unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4507destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4508arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4509automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4510For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4511linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4512@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4513ignored for other object file formats.
4514
4515The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4516constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4517Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4518the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4519first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4520of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4521compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4522formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4523@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4524the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4525destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4526@code{exit}.
4527
4528For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4529arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4530addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4531and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4532linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4533runtime code expects to see.
4534
4535@smallexample
4536 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4537 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4538 *(.ctors)
4539 LONG(0)
4540 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4541 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4542 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4543 *(.dtors)
4544 LONG(0)
4545 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4546@end smallexample
4547
4548If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4549which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4550are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4551are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4552command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4553@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4554@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4555@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4556
4557Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4558and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4559need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4560scripts.
4561
4562@end table
4563
4564@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4565@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4566@cindex discarding sections
4567@cindex sections, discarding
4568@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4569The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4570This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4571may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4572@smallexample
49c13adb 4573.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4574@end smallexample
4575@noindent
4576will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4577@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4578sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4579space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4580too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4581space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4582@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4583@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4584This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4585
a0976ea4 4586The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4587on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4588symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4589the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4590section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4591
4592@cindex /DISCARD/
4593The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4594input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4595section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4596
4597@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4598@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4599@cindex output section attributes
4600We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4601like this:
0c71d759 4602
252b5132 4603@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4604@group
7e7d5768 4605@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4606 [AT(@var{lma})]
4607 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4608 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4609 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4610 @{
4611 @var{output-section-command}
4612 @var{output-section-command}
4613 @dots{}
562d3460 4614 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4615@end group
4616@end smallexample
0c71d759 4617
252b5132
RH
4618We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4619@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4620remaining section attributes.
4621
a1ab1d2a 4622@menu
252b5132
RH
4623* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4624* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4625* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4626* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4627* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4628* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4629* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4630* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4631@end menu
4632
4633@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4634@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4635Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4636parentheses. The following types are defined:
4637
4638@table @code
4639@item NOLOAD
4640The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4641loaded into memory when the program is run.
4642@item DSECT
4643@itemx COPY
4644@itemx INFO
4645@itemx OVERLAY
4646These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4647rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4648marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4649section when the program is run.
4650@end table
4651
4652@kindex NOLOAD
4653@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4654@cindex loading, preventing
4655The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4656the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4657the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4658@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4659need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4660@smallexample
4661@group
4662SECTIONS @{
4663 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4664 @dots{}
4665@}
4666@end group
4667@end smallexample
4668
4669@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4670@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4671@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4672@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4673@cindex load address
4674@cindex section load address
4675Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4676@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4677@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4678specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4679address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4680
ea5cae92
NC
4681The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4682specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4683takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4684load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4685region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4686
4687If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4688section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4689load address:
4690
4691@itemize @bullet
4692@item
4693If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4694the LMA address as well.
4695
4696@item
4697If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4698
4699@item
4700Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4701with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4702section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4703VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4704the last section in the located region.
4705
4706@item
4707If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4708that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4709
4710@item
4711If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4712section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4713@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4714
4715@cindex ROM initialized data
4716@cindex initialized data in ROM
4717This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4718example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4719called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4720@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4721even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4722uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4723defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4724counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4725
4726@smallexample
4727@group
4728SECTIONS
4729 @{
4730 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4731 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4732 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4733 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4734 .bss 0x3000 :
4735 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4736@}
4737@end group
4738@end smallexample
4739
4740The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4741this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4742the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4743how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4744script.
4745
4746@smallexample
4747@group
4748extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4749char *src = &_etext;
4750char *dst = &_data;
4751
ea5cae92
NC
4752/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4753while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4754 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4755
ea5cae92 4756/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4757for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4758 *dst = 0;
4759@end group
4760@end smallexample
4761
bbf115d3
L
4762@node Forced Output Alignment
4763@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4764@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4765@cindex forcing output section alignment
4766@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4767You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4768alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4769intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4770
7e7d5768
AM
4771@node Forced Input Alignment
4772@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4773@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4774@cindex forcing input section alignment
4775@cindex input section alignment
4776You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4777SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4778sections, whether larger or smaller.
4779
0c71d759
NC
4780@node Output Section Constraint
4781@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4782@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4783@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4784@cindex constraints on output sections
4785You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4786of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4787read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4788@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4789
252b5132 4790@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4791@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4792@kindex >@var{region}
4793@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4794@cindex memory regions and sections
4795You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4796using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4797
4798Here is a simple example:
4799@smallexample
4800@group
4801MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4802SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4803@end group
4804@end smallexample
4805
4806@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4807@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4808@kindex :@var{phdr}
4809@cindex section, assigning to program header
4810@cindex program headers and sections
4811You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4812using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4813one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4814assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4815@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4816linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4817
4818Here is a simple example:
4819@smallexample
4820@group
4821PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4822SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4823@end group
4824@end smallexample
4825
4826@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4827@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4828@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4829@cindex section fill pattern
4830@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4831You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4832@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4833(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4834within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4835alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4836necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4837of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4838an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4839fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4840other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4841pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4842expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4843
4844You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4845output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4846
4847Here is a simple example:
4848@smallexample
4849@group
563e308f 4850SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4851@end group
4852@end smallexample
4853
4854@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4855@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4856@kindex OVERLAY
4857@cindex overlays
4858An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4859are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4860the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4861copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4862required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4863can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4864than another.
4865
4866Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4867@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4868output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4869command is as follows:
4870@smallexample
4871@group
4872OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4873 @{
4874 @var{secname1}
4875 @{
4876 @var{output-section-command}
4877 @var{output-section-command}
4878 @dots{}
4879 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4880 @var{secname2}
4881 @{
4882 @var{output-section-command}
4883 @var{output-section-command}
4884 @dots{}
4885 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4886 @dots{}
abc9061b 4887 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4888@end group
4889@end smallexample
4890
4891Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4892section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4893section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4894those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4895except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4896sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4897
abc9061b
CC
4898The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4899the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4900
252b5132
RH
4901The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4902addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4903memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4904whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4905and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4906and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4907
56dd11f0
NC
4908If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4909references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4910the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4911sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4912@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4913
4914For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4915provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4916defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4917@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4918the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4919within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4920symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4921
4922At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4923the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4924
4925Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4926@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4927@smallexample
4928@group
4929 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4930 @{
4931 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4932 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4933 @}
4934@end group
4935@end smallexample
4936@noindent
4937This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4938address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4939@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4940following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4941@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4942@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4943
4944C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4945like the following.
4946
4947@smallexample
4948@group
4949 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4950 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4951 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4952@end group
4953@end smallexample
4954
4955Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4956everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4957example could have been written identically as follows.
4958
4959@smallexample
4960@group
4961 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4962 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4963 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4964 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4965 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4966 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4967 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4968@end group
4969@end smallexample
4970
4971@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4972@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4973@kindex MEMORY
4974@cindex memory regions
4975@cindex regions of memory
4976@cindex allocating memory
4977@cindex discontinuous memory
4978The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4979memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4980
4981The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4982memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4983may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4984can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4985set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4986regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4987around to fit into the available regions.
4988
127fcdff
AB
4989A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
4990however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
4991specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
4992@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
4993@smallexample
4994@group
a1ab1d2a 4995MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4996 @{
4997 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4998 @dots{}
4999 @}
5000@end group
5001@end smallexample
5002
5003The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5004region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5005Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5006with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5007must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5008add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5009command.
252b5132
RH
5010
5011@cindex memory region attributes
5012The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5013whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5014not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5015@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5016section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5017the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5018them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5019
5020The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5021@table @samp
5022@item R
5023Read-only section
5024@item W
5025Read/write section
5026@item X
5027Executable section
5028@item A
5029Allocatable section
5030@item I
5031Initialized section
5032@item L
5033Same as @samp{I}
5034@item !
c09e9a8c 5035Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5036@end table
5037
5038If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5039@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5040attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5041in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5042attributes.
5043
5044@kindex ORIGIN =
5045@kindex o =
5046@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5047The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5048the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5049cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5050abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5051@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5052
5053@kindex LENGTH =
5054@kindex len =
5055@kindex l =
5056The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5057region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5058be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5059@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5060
5061In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5062available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5063and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5064linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5065is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5066or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5067explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5068region.
5069
5070@smallexample
5071@group
a1ab1d2a 5072MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5073 @{
5074 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5075 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5076 @}
5077@end group
5078@end smallexample
5079
5080Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5081specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5082@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5083a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5084output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5085was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5086the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5087output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5088region, the linker will issue an error message.
5089
3ec57632 5090It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5091expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5092@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5093
5094@smallexample
5095@group
c0065db7 5096 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5097@end group
5098@end smallexample
5099
252b5132
RH
5100@node PHDRS
5101@section PHDRS Command
5102@kindex PHDRS
5103@cindex program headers
5104@cindex ELF program headers
5105@cindex program segments
5106@cindex segments, ELF
5107The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5108@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5109loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5110program with the @samp{-p} option.
5111
5112When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5113reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5114program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5115This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5116interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5117
5118The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5119in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5120precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5121the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5122not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5123
5124The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5125generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5126ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5127
5128This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5129@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5130
5131@smallexample
5132@group
5133PHDRS
5134@{
5135 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5136 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5137@}
5138@end group
5139@end smallexample
5140
5141The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5142of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5143header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5144with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5145must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5146is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5147
5148Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5149system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5150specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5151sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5152attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5153Section Phdr}.
5154
5155It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5156merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5157repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5158contain the section.
5159
5160If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5161then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5162not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5163convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5164placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5165default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5166segment at all.
5167
5168@kindex FILEHDR
5169@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5170You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5171the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5172The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5173file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5174include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5175segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5176these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5177
5178The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5179value of the keyword.
5180
5181@table @asis
5182@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5183Indicates an unused program header.
5184
5185@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5186Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5187the file.
5188
5189@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5190Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5191
5192@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5193Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5194found.
5195
5196@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5197Indicates a segment holding note information.
5198
5199@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5200A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5201ABI.
5202
5203@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5204Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5205
5206@item @var{expression}
5207An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5208be used for types not defined above.
5209@end table
5210
5211You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5212in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5213@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5214Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5215output section attribute.
5216
5217The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5218which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5219explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5220an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5221header.
5222
5223Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5224headers used on a native ELF system.
5225
5226@example
5227@group
5228PHDRS
5229@{
5230 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5231 interp PT_INTERP ;
5232 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5233 data PT_LOAD ;
5234 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5235@}
5236
5237SECTIONS
5238@{
5239 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5240 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5241 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5242 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5243 @dots{}
5244 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5245 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5246 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5247 @dots{}
5248@}
5249@end group
5250@end example
5251
5252@node VERSION
5253@section VERSION Command
5254@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5255@cindex symbol versions
5256@cindex version script
5257@cindex versions of symbols
5258The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5259only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5260symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5261a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5262shared library.
5263
5264You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5265you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5266also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5267
5268The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5269@smallexample
5270VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5271@end smallexample
5272
5273The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5274Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5275version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5276version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5277version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5278scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5279library.
5280
5281The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5282examples.
5283
5284@smallexample
5285VERS_1.1 @{
5286 global:
5287 foo1;
5288 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5289 old*;
5290 original*;
5291 new*;
252b5132
RH
5292@};
5293
5294VERS_1.2 @{
5295 foo2;
5296@} VERS_1.1;
5297
5298VERS_2.0 @{
5299 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5300 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5301 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5302 "f(int, double)";
5303 @};
252b5132
RH
5304@} VERS_1.2;
5305@end smallexample
5306
5307This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5308version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5309The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5310a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5311of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5312symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5313is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5314in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5315However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5316name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5317
5318Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5319depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5320to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5321
5322Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5323depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5324and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5325
5326When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5327specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5328unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5329unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5330somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5331wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5332wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5333set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5334ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5335
5336The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5337they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5338could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5339However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5340
0f6bf451 5341Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5342in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5343symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5344won't.
5345
5346@smallexample
7c9c73be 5347@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5348@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5349
252b5132
RH
5350When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5351symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5352requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5353shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5354loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5355linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5356application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5357way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5358all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5359search for each symbol reference.
5360
5361The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5362doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5363that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5364functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5365the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5366required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5367that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5368versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5369the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5370
5371There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5372first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5373source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5374script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5375maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5376@smallexample
5377__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5378@end smallexample
5379@noindent
5380in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5381be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5382The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5383@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5384takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5385
5386The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5387function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5388an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5389version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5390linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5391
5392To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5393source file. Here is an example:
5394
5395@smallexample
5396__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5397__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5398__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5399__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5400@end smallexample
5401
5402In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5403unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5404example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5405@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5406
5407When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5408some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5409this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5410@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5411declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5412you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5413
5414If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5415within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5416(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5417specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5418
cb840a31
L
5419You can also specify the language in the version script:
5420
5421@smallexample
5422VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5423@end smallexample
5424
c0065db7 5425The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5426The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5427demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5428patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5429@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5430
86043bbb
MM
5431Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5432described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5433or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5434the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5435whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5436cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5437might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5438should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5439expect when you upgrade.
5440
252b5132
RH
5441@node Expressions
5442@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5443@cindex expressions
5444@cindex arithmetic
5445The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5446that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5447expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5448host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5449
5450You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5451
5452The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5453expressions.
5454
5455@menu
5456* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5457* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5458* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5459* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5460* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5461* Operators:: Operators
5462* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5463* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5464* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5465@end menu
5466
5467@node Constants
5468@subsection Constants
5469@cindex integer notation
5470@cindex constants in linker scripts
5471All constants are integers.
5472
5473As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5474octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5475hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5476@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5477@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5478value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5479
5480@cindex scaled integers
5481@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5482@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5483@cindex suffixes for integers
5484@cindex integer suffixes
5485In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5486constant by
5487@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5488@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5489@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5490@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5491@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5492@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5493@tex
5494${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5495@end tex
5496@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5497respectively. For example, the following
5498all refer to the same quantity:
5499
252b5132 5500@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5501_fourk_1 = 4K;
5502_fourk_2 = 4096;
5503_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5504_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5505@end smallexample
5506
8a308ae8
NC
5507Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5508conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5509
0c71d759
NC
5510@node Symbolic Constants
5511@subsection Symbolic Constants
5512@cindex symbolic constants
5513@kindex CONSTANT
5514It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5515the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5516
5517@table @code
5518@item MAXPAGESIZE
5519@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5520The target's maximum page size.
5521
5522@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5523@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5524The target's default page size.
5525@end table
5526
5527So for example:
5528
5529@smallexample
9d5777a3 5530 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5531@end smallexample
5532
5533will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5534supported by the target.
5535
252b5132
RH
5536@node Symbols
5537@subsection Symbol Names
5538@cindex symbol names
5539@cindex names
5540@cindex quoted symbol names
5541@kindex "
5542Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5543and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5544Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5545specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5546keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5547@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5548"SECTION" = 9;
5549"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5550@end smallexample
5551
5552Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5553to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5554whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5555
ecca9871
L
5556@node Orphan Sections
5557@subsection Orphan Sections
5558@cindex orphan
5559Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5560are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5561script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5562output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5563placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5564attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5565same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5566If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5567at the end of the file.
5568
5569For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5570well as section flag.
5571
41911f68 5572If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5573the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5574__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5575section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5576orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5577representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5578character.
5579
252b5132
RH
5580@node Location Counter
5581@subsection The Location Counter
5582@kindex .
5583@cindex dot
5584@cindex location counter
5585@cindex current output location
5586The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5587current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5588location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5589within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5590anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5591
5592@cindex holes
5593Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5594moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5595location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5596and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5597doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5598
5599@smallexample
5600SECTIONS
5601@{
5602 output :
5603 @{
5604 file1(.text)
5605 . = . + 1000;
5606 file2(.text)
5607 . += 1000;
5608 file3(.text)
563e308f 5609 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5610@}
5611@end smallexample
5612@noindent
5613In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5614located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5615followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5616@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5617@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5618specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5619
5c6bbab8
NC
5620@cindex dot inside sections
5621Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5622current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5623statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5624absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5625however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5626not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5627
5628@smallexample
5629SECTIONS
5630@{
5631 . = 0x100
5632 .text: @{
5633 *(.text)
5634 . = 0x200
5635 @}
5636 . = 0x500
5637 .data: @{
5638 *(.data)
5639 . += 0x600
5640 @}
5641@}
5642@end smallexample
5643
5644The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5645and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5646the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5647much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5648move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5649and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5650the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5651the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5652
b5666f2f
AM
5653@cindex dot outside sections
5654Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5655output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5656needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5657
5658@smallexample
5659SECTIONS
5660@{
5661 start_of_text = . ;
5662 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5663 end_of_text = . ;
5664
5665 start_of_data = . ;
5666 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5667 end_of_data = . ;
5668@}
5669@end smallexample
5670
5671If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5672not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5673between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5674should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5675blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5676the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5677sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5678statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5679special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5680place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5681as follows:
5682
5683@smallexample
5684SECTIONS
5685@{
5686 start_of_text = . ;
5687 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5688 end_of_text = . ;
5689
5690 start_of_data = . ;
5691 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5692 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5693 end_of_data = . ;
5694@}
5695@end smallexample
5696
5697This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5698@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5699placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5700assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5701a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5702section. So you could write:
5703
5704@smallexample
5705SECTIONS
5706@{
5707 start_of_text = . ;
5708 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5709 end_of_text = . ;
5710
5711 . = . ;
5712 start_of_data = . ;
5713 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5714 end_of_data = . ;
5715@}
5716@end smallexample
5717
5718Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5719@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5720
252b5132
RH
5721@need 2000
5722@node Operators
5723@subsection Operators
5724@cindex operators for arithmetic
5725@cindex arithmetic operators
5726@cindex precedence in expressions
5727The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5728the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5729@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5730@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5731@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5732@smallexample
5733precedence associativity Operators Notes
5734(highest)
57351 left ! - ~ (1)
57362 left * / %
57373 left + -
57384 left >> <<
57395 left == != > < <= >=
57406 left &
57417 left |
57428 left &&
57439 left ||
574410 right ? :
574511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5746(lowest)
5747@end smallexample
5748Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5749(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5750(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5751@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5752@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5753@tex
5754\vskip \baselineskip
5755%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5756\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5757\hrule
5758\halign
5759{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5760height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5761&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5762height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5763\noalign{\hrule}
5764height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5765&highest&&&&&\cr
5766% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5767&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5768&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5769&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5770&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5771&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5772&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5773&7&&left&&|&\cr
5774&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5775&9&&left&&||&\cr
5776&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5777&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5778&lowest&&&&&\cr
5779height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5780\hrule}
5781@end tex
5782@iftex
5783{
5784@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5785@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5786@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5787}
5788@end iftex
5789@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5790
5791@node Evaluation
5792@subsection Evaluation
5793@cindex lazy evaluation
5794@cindex expression evaluation order
5795The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5796an expression when absolutely necessary.
5797
5798The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5799address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5800regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5801as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5802
5803However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5804until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5805other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5806for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5807
5808The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5809assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5810allocation.
5811
5812Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5813@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5814
5815If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5816available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5817following
5818@smallexample
5819@group
5820SECTIONS
5821 @{
a1ab1d2a 5822 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5823 @{ *(.text) @}
5824 @}
5825@end group
5826@end smallexample
5827@noindent
5828will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5829address}.
5830
5831@node Expression Section
5832@subsection The Section of an Expression
5833@cindex expression sections
5834@cindex absolute expressions
5835@cindex relative expressions
5836@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5837@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5838@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5839Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5840relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5841using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5842value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5843symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5844operations.
5845
abf4be64
AM
5846Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5847section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5848address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5849@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5850functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5851One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5852(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5853differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5854versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5855section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5856Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5857absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5858given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5859everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5860
5861In the following simple example,
252b5132 5862
7542af2a
AM
5863@smallexample
5864@group
5865SECTIONS
5866 @{
5867 . = 0x100;
5868 __executable_start = 0x100;
5869 .data :
5870 @{
5871 . = 0x10;
5872 __data_start = 0x10;
5873 *(.data)
5874 @}
5875 @dots{}
5876 @}
5877@end group
5878@end smallexample
252b5132 5879
7542af2a
AM
5880both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5881address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5882@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5883section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5884
5c3049d2
AM
5885For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5886addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5887
5888@itemize @bullet
5889@item
c05f749e
AM
5890Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5891operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5892absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5893@item
7542af2a
AM
5894Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5895relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5896and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5897@item
c05f749e
AM
5898Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5899in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5900address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5901before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5902@end itemize
5903
5904The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5905
5906@itemize @bullet
5907@item
5908An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5909@item
5910The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5911@item
9bc8bb33 5912The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5913relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5914(after above conversions) is also a number.
5915@item
5916The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5917relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5918section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5919@item
5920The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5921conversions) is an absolute address.
5922@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5923
5924You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5925to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5926create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5927section @samp{.data}:
5928@smallexample
5929SECTIONS
5930 @{
5931 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5932 @}
5933@end smallexample
5934@noindent
5935If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5936@samp{.data} section.
5937
7542af2a
AM
5938Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5939particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5940
252b5132
RH
5941@node Builtin Functions
5942@subsection Builtin Functions
5943@cindex functions in expressions
5944The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5945use in linker script expressions.
5946
5947@table @code
5948@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5949@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5950@cindex expression, absolute
5951Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5952of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5953value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5954normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5955
5956@item ADDR(@var{section})
5957@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5958@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5959Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5960script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5961the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5962@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5963@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5964the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5965@smallexample
5966@group
5967SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5968 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5969 @{
252b5132
RH
5970 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5971 @dots{}
5972 @}
5973 .output :
5974 @{
5975 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5976 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5977 @}
5978@dots{} @}
5979@end group
5980@end smallexample
5981
876f4090
NS
5982@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5983@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5984@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5985@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5986@cindex round up location counter
5987@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5988@cindex round up expression
5989@cindex align expression
5990Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5991to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5992doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5993arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5994expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 5995equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
5996
5997Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5998next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5999variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6000input sections:
252b5132
RH
6001@smallexample
6002@group
6003SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6004 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6005 *(.data)
6006 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6007 @}
6008@dots{} @}
6009@end group
6010@end smallexample
6011@noindent
6012The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6013a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6014a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6015of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6016
6017The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6018
362c1d1a
NS
6019@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6020@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6021@cindex section alignment
6022Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6023been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6024evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6025the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6026value in that section.
6027@smallexample
6028@group
6029SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6030 .output @{
6031 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6032 @dots{}
6033 @}
6034@dots{} @}
6035@end group
6036@end smallexample
6037
252b5132
RH
6038@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6039@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6040This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6041scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6042section.
6043
2d20f7bf
JJ
6044@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6045@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6046This is equivalent to either
6047@smallexample
6048(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6049@end smallexample
6050or
6051@smallexample
6052(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6053@end smallexample
6054@noindent
6055depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6056for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6057@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6058If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6059memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6060bytes in the on-disk file.
6061
6062This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6063any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6064@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6065be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6066working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6067
6068@noindent
6069Example:
6070@smallexample
6071 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6072@end smallexample
6073
6074@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6075@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6076This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6077evaluation purposes.
6078
6079@smallexample
6080 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6081@end smallexample
6082
a4f5ad88
JJ
6083@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6084@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6085This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6086@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6087When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6088does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6089@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6090boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6091it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6092@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6093padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6094section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6095
6096@smallexample
6097 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6098@end smallexample
6099
252b5132
RH
6100@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6101@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6102@cindex symbol defaults
6103Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6104defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6105return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6106default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6107shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6108the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6109existed, its value is preserved:
6110
6111@smallexample
6112@group
6113SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6114 .text : @{
6115 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6116 @dots{}
6117 @}
6118 @dots{}
6119@}
6120@end group
6121@end smallexample
6122
3ec57632
NC
6123@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6124@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6125Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6126
252b5132
RH
6127@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6128@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6129@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6130Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6131Section LMA}).
6132
2e53f7d6
NC
6133@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6134@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6135Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6136@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6137
252b5132
RH
6138@kindex MAX
6139@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6140Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6141
6142@kindex MIN
6143@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6144Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6145
6146@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6147@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6148@cindex unallocated address, next
6149Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6150This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6151use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6152output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6153
3ec57632
NC
6154@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6155@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6156Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6157
ba916c8a
MM
6158@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6159@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6160Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6161value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6162@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6163will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6164can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6165``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6166name.
6167
252b5132
RH
6168@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6169@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6170@cindex section size
6171Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6172been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6173evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6174@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6175@smallexample
6176@group
6177SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6178 .output @{
6179 .start = . ;
6180 @dots{}
6181 .end = . ;
6182 @}
6183 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6184 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6185@dots{} @}
6186@end group
6187@end smallexample
6188
6189@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6190@itemx sizeof_headers
6191@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6192@cindex header size
6193Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6194information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6195this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6196choose, to facilitate paging.
6197
6198@cindex not enough room for program headers
6199@cindex program headers, not enough room
6200When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6201@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6202number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6203addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6204additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6205room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6206the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6207script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6208you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6209command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6210@end table
6211
6212@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6213@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6214@cindex implicit linker scripts
6215If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6216an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6217linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6218linker will report an error.
6219
6220An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6221
6222Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6223assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6224commands.
6225
6226Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6227at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6228read. This can affect archive searching.
6229
6230@ifset GENERIC
6231@node Machine Dependent
6232@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6233
6234@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6235@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6236sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6237functionality are not listed.
6238
6239@menu
36f63dca
NC
6240@ifset H8300
6241* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6242@end ifset
6243@ifset I960
6244* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6245@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6246@ifset M68HC11
6247* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6248@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6249@ifset ARM
6250* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6251@end ifset
6252@ifset HPPA
6253* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6254@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6255@ifset M68K
6256* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6257@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6258@ifset MIPS
6259* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6260@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6261@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6262* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6263@end ifset
2469cfa2 6264@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6265* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6266@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6267@ifset NDS32
6268* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6269@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6270@ifset NIOSII
6271* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6272@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6273@ifset POWERPC
6274* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6275@end ifset
6276@ifset POWERPC64
6277* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6278@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6279@ifset SPU
6280* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6281@end ifset
74459f0e 6282@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6283* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6284@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6285@ifset WIN32
6286* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6287@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6288@ifset XTENSA
6289* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6290@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6291@end menu
6292@end ifset
6293
252b5132
RH
6294@ifset H8300
6295@ifclear GENERIC
6296@raisesections
6297@end ifclear
6298
6299@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6300@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6301
6302@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6303For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6304you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6305
6306@table @emph
6307@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6308@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6309@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6310targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6311program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6312respectively.
6313
6314@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6315@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6316@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6317@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6318sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6319page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6320(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6321@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6322top page of memory).
1502569c 6323
81f5558e
NC
6324@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6325indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6326displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6327the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6328@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6329whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6330range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6331
1502569c 6332@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6333@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6334biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6335which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6336page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6337(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6338@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6339the top page of memory).
6340
6341@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6342@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
634332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6344changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6345(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6346@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6347the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6348@end table
6349
6350@ifclear GENERIC
6351@lowersections
6352@end ifclear
6353@end ifset
6354
36f63dca 6355@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6356@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6357@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6358@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6359@node Renesas
6360@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6361
c2dcd04e
NC
6362@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6363H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6364options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6365@end ifset
6366@end ifclear
6367
6368@ifset I960
6369@ifclear GENERIC
6370@raisesections
6371@end ifclear
6372
6373@node i960
6374@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6375
6376@cindex i960 support
6377
6378You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6379specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6380family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6381incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6382linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6383libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6384search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6385
6386For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6387well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6388paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6389the names
6390
6391@smallexample
6392@group
6393try
6394libtry.a
6395tryca
6396libtryca.a
6397@end group
6398@end smallexample
6399
6400@noindent
6401The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6402two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6403
6404You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6405the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6406use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6407specifies a library.
6408
6409@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6410@cindex relaxing on i960
6411@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6412you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6413@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6414them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6415instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6416instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6417target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6418not itself call any subroutines).
6419
6420@ifclear GENERIC
6421@lowersections
6422@end ifclear
6423@end ifset
6424
6425@ifset ARM
6426@ifclear GENERIC
6427@raisesections
6428@end ifclear
6429
93fd0973
SC
6430@ifset M68HC11
6431@ifclear GENERIC
6432@raisesections
6433@end ifclear
6434
6435@node M68HC11/68HC12
6436@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6437
6438@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6439
6440@subsection Linker Relaxation
6441
6442For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6443optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6444
6445@table @emph
6446@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6447@item relaxing address modes
6448@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6449targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6450program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6451respectively.
6452
6453@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6454transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6455page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6456
6457@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6458When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6459of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6460addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6461@code{bset} instructions.
6462
6463@end table
6464
6465@subsection Trampoline Generation
6466
6467@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6468@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6469For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6470call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6471will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6472trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6473case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6474point to the function trampoline.
6475
6476@ifclear GENERIC
6477@lowersections
6478@end ifclear
6479@end ifset
6480
36f63dca 6481@node ARM
3674e28a 6482@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6483
6484@cindex ARM interworking support
6485@kindex --support-old-code
6486For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6487between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6488been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6489line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6490libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6491option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6492given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6493which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6494the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6495non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6496
6497@cindex thumb entry point
6498@cindex entry point, thumb
6499@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6500The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6501@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6502But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6503branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6504executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6505
ce11ba6c
KT
6506@cindex PE import table prefixing
6507@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6508The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6509the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6510element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6511import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6512
e489d0ae
PB
6513@cindex BE8
6514@kindex --be8
6515The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6516executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6517objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6518option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6519little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6520
3674e28a
PB
6521@cindex TARGET1
6522@kindex --target1-rel
6523@kindex --target1-abs
6524The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6525@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6526or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6527and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6528
6529@cindex TARGET2
6530@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6531The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6532@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6533meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6534@table @samp
6535@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6536@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6537@item abs
6538@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6539@item got-rel
6540@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6541@end table
6542
319850b4
JB
6543@cindex FIX_V4BX
6544@kindex --fix-v4bx
6545The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6546specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6547interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6548also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6549
6550In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6551linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6552@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6553
6554In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6555relocations are ignored.
6556
845b51d6
PB
6557@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6558@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6559Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6560relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6561
6562@smallexample
6563TST rM, #1
6564MOVEQ PC, rM
6565BX Rn
6566@end smallexample
6567
6568This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6569and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6570condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6571
33bfe774
JB
6572@cindex USE_BLX
6573@kindex --use-blx
6574The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6575BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6576situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6577code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6578each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6579
6580This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6581specify it if you are using that target.
6582
c6dd86c6
JB
6583@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6584@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6585The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6586bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6587instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6588to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6589the support code can read the intended values.
6590
6591The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6592intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6593and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6594intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6595full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6596you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6597
6598If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6599enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6600@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6601mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6602vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6603@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6604
6605If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6606potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6607such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6608first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6609instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6610the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6611are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6612
2de70689
MGD
6613@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6614@kindex --fix-arm1176
6615@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6616The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6617in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6618are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6619unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6620
9d5777a3 6621Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6622Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6623http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6624
bf21ed78
MS
6625@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6626@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6627The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6628warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6629enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6630linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6631using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6632not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6633
6634@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6635@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6636The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6637warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6638@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6639linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6640using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6641
726150b7
NC
6642@cindex PIC_VENEER
6643@kindex --pic-veneer
6644The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6645ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6646is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6647@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6648
6649@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6650@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6651The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6652code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6653perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6654placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6655controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6656The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6657duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6658group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6659code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6660where they should be placed.
6661
6662The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6663@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6664placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6665branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6666placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6667value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6668exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6669A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6670linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6671from the input sections.
6672
6673The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6674@samp{N = +1}.
6675
1a51c1a4
NC
6676Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6677only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6678otherwise.
6679
1db37fe6
YG
6680@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6681@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6682@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6683The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6684
6685The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6686
68fcca92
JW
6687@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6688@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6689@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6690The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6691
6692Please contact ARM for further details.
6693
1db37fe6
YG
6694@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6695@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6696@cindex Merging exidx entries
6697The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6698
6699@kindex --long-plt
6700@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6701The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6702which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6703entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6704
36f63dca
NC
6705@ifclear GENERIC
6706@lowersections
6707@end ifclear
6708@end ifset
6709
6710@ifset HPPA
6711@ifclear GENERIC
6712@raisesections
6713@end ifclear
6714
6715@node HPPA ELF32
6716@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6717@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6718@kindex --multi-subspace
6719When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6720import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6721The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6722stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6723multiple sub-spaces.
6724
6725@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6726@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6727Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6728stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6729@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6730sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6731a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6732the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6733conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6734prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6735A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6736branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6737@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6738@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6739detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6740positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6741
6742Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6743single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6744create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6745large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6746
6747@ifclear GENERIC
6748@lowersections
6749@end ifclear
6750@end ifset
6751
7fb9f789
NC
6752@ifset M68K
6753@ifclear GENERIC
6754@raisesections
6755@end ifclear
6756
6757@node M68K
6758@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6759
6760@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6761@kindex --got=@var{type}
6762The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6763The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6764@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6765the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6766@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6767entries only at non-negative offsets.
6768@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6769entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6770support such GOTs.
6771@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6772output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6773file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6774files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6775
6776@ifclear GENERIC
6777@lowersections
6778@end ifclear
6779@end ifset
6780
833794fc
MR
6781@ifset MIPS
6782@ifclear GENERIC
6783@raisesections
6784@end ifclear
6785
6786@node MIPS
6787@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6788
6789@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6790@kindex --insn32
6791@kindex --no-insn32
6792The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6793microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6794in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6795used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6796or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6797including 16-bit ones where possible.
6798
6799@ifclear GENERIC
6800@lowersections
6801@end ifclear
6802@end ifset
6803
36f63dca
NC
6804@ifset MMIX
6805@ifclear GENERIC
6806@raisesections
6807@end ifclear
6808
6809@node MMIX
6810@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6811For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6812@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6813understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6814can translate between the two formats.
6815
6816There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6817Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6818registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6819equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6820@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6821global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6822this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6823symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6824
7a2de473
HPN
6825Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6826@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6827The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6828of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6829
6830Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6831are left out from an mmo file.
6832
6833@ifclear GENERIC
6834@lowersections
6835@end ifclear
6836@end ifset
6837
6838@ifset MSP430
6839@ifclear GENERIC
6840@raisesections
6841@end ifclear
6842
6843@node MSP430
6844@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6845For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6846will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6847just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6848
6849@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6850The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6851
6852@table @code
6853@item @samp{.vectors}
6854Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6855
6856@item @samp{.bootloader}
6857Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6858in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6859
6860@item @samp{.infomem}
6861Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6862this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6863
c0065db7 6864@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6865This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6866in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6867
6868@item @samp{.noinit}
6869Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6870
c0065db7 6871The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6872@end table
6873
6874@ifclear GENERIC
6875@lowersections
6876@end ifclear
6877@end ifset
6878
35c08157
KLC
6879@ifset NDS32
6880@ifclear GENERIC
6881@raisesections
6882@end ifclear
6883
6884@node NDS32
6885@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6886@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6887For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6888relaxes objects according to these options.
6889
6890@table @code
6891@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6892Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6893
6894@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6895Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6896
6897@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6898Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6899
6900@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6901Export the EX9 table after linking.
6902
6903@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6904Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6905
6906@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6907Update the existing EX9 table.
6908
6909@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6910Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6911
6912@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6913Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6914
6915@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6916Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6917
6918@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6919Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6920@end table
6921
6922@ifclear GENERIC
6923@lowersections
6924@end ifclear
6925@end ifset
6926
78058a5e
SL
6927@ifset NIOSII
6928@ifclear GENERIC
6929@raisesections
6930@end ifclear
6931
6932@node Nios II
6933@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6934@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6935@kindex --relax on Nios II
6936
6937Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6938transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6939which may result in @command{ld} giving
6940@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6941The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6942trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6943outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6944trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6945be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6946larger than 256MB.
6947
6948The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6949is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6950@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6951locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6952source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6953register as a temporary.
6954
6955Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6956relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6957option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6958
6959@ifclear GENERIC
6960@lowersections
6961@end ifclear
6962@end ifset
6963
2a60a7a8
AM
6964@ifset POWERPC
6965@ifclear GENERIC
6966@raisesections
6967@end ifclear
6968
6969@node PowerPC ELF32
6970@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6971@cindex PowerPC long branches
6972@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6973Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6974displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6975@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6976@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6977the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6978section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6979section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6980@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6981both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6982considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6983
6984@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6985@table @option
6986@cindex PowerPC PLT
6987@kindex --bss-plt
6988@item --bss-plt
6989Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6990generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6991the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6992writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6993@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6994PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6995compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6996BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6997
016687f8
AM
6998@kindex --secure-plt
6999@item --secure-plt
7000@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7001@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7002when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7003layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7004style BSS PLT.
7005
2a60a7a8
AM
7006@cindex PowerPC GOT
7007@kindex --sdata-got
7008@item --sdata-got
7009The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7010sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7011@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7012section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7013@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7014@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7015@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7016@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7017PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7018pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7019GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7020really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7021
7022@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7023@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7024@item --emit-stub-syms
7025This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7026symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7027
7028@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7029@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7030@item --no-tls-optimize
7031PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7032sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7033disable the optimization.
7034@end table
7035
7036@ifclear GENERIC
7037@lowersections
7038@end ifclear
7039@end ifset
7040
7041@ifset POWERPC64
7042@ifclear GENERIC
7043@raisesections
7044@end ifclear
7045
7046@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7047@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7048
7049@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7050@table @option
7051@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7052@kindex --stub-group-size
7053@item --stub-group-size
7054Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7055by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7056@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7057sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7058a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7059the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7060conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7061prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7062A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7063branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7064@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7065@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7066detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7067positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7068
7069Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7070single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7071create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7072large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7073
7074@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7075@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7076@item --emit-stub-syms
7077This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7078symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7079
7080@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7081@kindex --dotsyms
7082@kindex --no-dotsyms
7083@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7084These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7085in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7086function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7087code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7088properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7089to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7090@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7091dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7092feature.
7093
7094@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7095@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7096@item --no-tls-optimize
7097PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7098sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7099disable the optimization.
7100
7101@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7102@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7103@item --no-opd-optimize
7104PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7105corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7106the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7107Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7108
7109@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7110@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7111@item --non-overlapping-opd
7112Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7113@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7114the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7115entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7116
7117@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7118@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7119@item --no-toc-optimize
7120PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7121entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7122reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7123marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7124marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7125relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7126unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7127reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7128discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7129reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7130code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7131optimization.
7132
7133@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7134@kindex --no-multi-toc
7135@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7136If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7137@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7138where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7139entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7140total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7141grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7142TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7143calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7144help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
714564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7146Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7147
7148@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7149@kindex --no-toc-sort
7150@item --no-toc-sort
7151By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7152happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7153placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7154with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7155referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7156@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7157results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7158off this feature.
7159
7160@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7161@kindex --plt-align
7162@kindex --no-plt-align
7163@item --plt-align
7164@itemx --no-plt-align
7165Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7166padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7167specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7168that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7169stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7170
7171@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7172@kindex --plt-static-chain
7173@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7174@item --plt-static-chain
7175@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7176Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7177chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7178chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7179
7180@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7181@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7182@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7183@item --plt-thread-safe
7184@itemx --no-thread-safe
7185With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7186lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7187another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7188order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7189memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7190barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7191looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7192seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7193default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7194@end table
7195
7196@ifclear GENERIC
7197@lowersections
7198@end ifclear
7199@end ifset
7200
49fa1e15
AM
7201@ifset SPU
7202@ifclear GENERIC
7203@raisesections
7204@end ifclear
7205
7206@node SPU ELF
7207@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7208
7209@cindex SPU ELF options
7210@table @option
7211
7212@cindex SPU plugins
7213@kindex --plugin
7214@item --plugin
7215This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7216
7217@cindex SPU overlays
7218@kindex --no-overlays
7219@item --no-overlays
7220Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7221regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7222@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7223turns off all this special overlay handling.
7224
7225@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7226@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7227@item --emit-stub-syms
7228This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7229symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7230
7231@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7232@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7233@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7234This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7235function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7236on calls to non-overlay regions.
7237
7238@cindex SPU local store size
7239@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7240@item --local-store=lo:hi
7241@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7242the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7243range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7244
c0065db7 7245@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7246@kindex --stack-analysis
7247@item --stack-analysis
7248SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7249unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7250under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7251@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7252@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7253determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7254for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7255for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7256for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7257find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7258and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7259under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7260dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7261is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7262and calls will be given.
7263
c0065db7 7264@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7265@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7266@item --emit-stack-syms
7267This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7268in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7269These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7270functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7271functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7272such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7273The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7274@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7275@end table
7276
7277@ifclear GENERIC
7278@lowersections
7279@end ifclear
7280@end ifset
7281
36f63dca
NC
7282@ifset TICOFF
7283@ifclear GENERIC
7284@raisesections
7285@end ifclear
7286
7287@node TI COFF
7288@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7289@cindex TI COFF versions
7290@kindex --format=@var{version}
7291The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7292TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7293also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7294format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7295header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7296
7297@ifclear GENERIC
7298@lowersections
7299@end ifclear
7300@end ifset
7301
2ca22b03
NC
7302@ifset WIN32
7303@ifclear GENERIC
7304@raisesections
7305@end ifclear
7306
7307@node WIN32
7308@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7309
c0065db7 7310This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7311See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7312command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7313
7314@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7315@cindex import libraries
7316@item import libraries
69da35b5 7317The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7318libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7319regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7320archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7321support for creating such libraries provided with the
7322@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7323
c0065db7
RM
7324@item exporting DLL symbols
7325@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7326The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7327
7328@table @emph
7329@item using auto-export functionality
7330@cindex using auto-export functionality
7331By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7332which is controlled by the following command line options:
7333
0a5d968e
NC
7334@itemize
7335@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7336@item --exclude-symbols
7337@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7338@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7339@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7340@end itemize
7341
09e2aba4
DK
7342When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7343(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7344symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7345often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7346private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7347options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7348exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7349final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7350
7351If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7352command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7353if either of the following are true:
7354
7355@itemize
7356@item A DEF file is used.
7357@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7358@end itemize
dc8465bf 7359
c0065db7
RM
7360@item using a DEF file
7361@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7362Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7363an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7364exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7365name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7366command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7367
7368@example
7369gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7370@end example
7371
0a5d968e
NC
7372Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7373@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7374
dc8465bf
NC
7375Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7376
7377@example
4b5bd4e7 7378LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7379
7380EXPORTS
7381foo
7382bar
7383_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7384another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7385var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7386doo = foo == foo2
7387eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7388@end example
dc8465bf 7389
7fcab871 7390This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7391symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7392alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7393by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7394@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7395@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7396export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7397in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7398symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7399
6b31ad16
DS
7400The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7401name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7402the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7403
b45619c0
NC
7404When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7405library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7406@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7407executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7408
7409With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7410specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7411non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7412
7413If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7414or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7415filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7416
4b5bd4e7
DS
7417The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7418
7419@example
7420EXPORTS
7421 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7422 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7423 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7424@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7425
7426Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7427@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7428@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7429@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7430Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7431@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7432string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7433
7434The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7435
7436@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7437will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7438by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7439linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7440library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7441
7442@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7443The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7444the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7445@code{*_imp__foo}).
7446
7447@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7448well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7449read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7450variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7451the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7452extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7453application will behave unexpectedly.
7454
7455@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7456it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7457symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7458API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7459the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7460
4b5bd4e7
DS
7461See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7462other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7463
7464@cindex creating a DEF file
7465While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7466with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7467
7468@item Using decorations
7469@cindex Using decorations
7470Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7471itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7472declared as:
7473
7474@example
7475__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7476__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7477@end example
7478
7479All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7480any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7481this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7482the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7483
7484Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7485decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7486instead:
7487
7488@example
7489__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7490__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7491@end example
7492
c0065db7
RM
7493This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7494when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7495variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7496code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7497of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7498omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7499@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7500information.
c0065db7 7501@end table
dc8465bf 7502
2ca22b03
NC
7503@cindex automatic data imports
7504@item automatic data imports
7505The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7506by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7507compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7508issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7509code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7510c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7511initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7512decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7513platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7514command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7515The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7516suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7517trigger the feature's use.
7518
c0065db7 7519auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7520additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7521
c0065db7 7522"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7523documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7524
c0065db7
RM
7525The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7526occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7527One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7528below.
7529
7530@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7531For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7532object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7533offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7534field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7535in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7536without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7537The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7538references.
7539
c0065db7
RM
7540The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7541be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7542themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7543runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7544compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7545support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7546run without error on an older system.
7547
c0065db7
RM
7548@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7549enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7550
7551@cindex direct linking to a dll
7552@item direct linking to a dll
7553The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7554including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7555libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7556traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7557libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7558function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7559though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7560storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7561tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7562large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7563
c0065db7 7564Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7565@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7566of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7567perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7568select the dll instead of an import library.
7569
2ca22b03 7570
69da35b5
NC
7571For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7572to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7573
7574@example
45e948fe
NC
7575libxxx.dll.a
7576xxx.dll.a
7577libxxx.a
7578xxx.lib
69da35b5 7579cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7580libxxx.dll
7581xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7582@end example
7583
69da35b5
NC
7584before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7585
c0065db7
RM
7586(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7587where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7588@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7589file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7590@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7591
c0065db7
RM
7592Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7593@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7594was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7595various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7596could coexist on the same machine.
7597
2ca22b03
NC
7598The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7599applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7600libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7601
7602@example
7603bin/
7604 cygxxx.dll
7605lib/
7606 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7607 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7608@end example
7609
c0065db7
RM
7610Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7611done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7612
76131. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7614@example
7615gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7616@end example
2ca22b03 7617
69da35b5
NC
7618However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7619(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7620@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7621not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7622
2ca22b03
NC
76232. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7624directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7625should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7626making the app/dll.
7627
7628@example
7629ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7630@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7631
7632Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7633
7634@example
7635gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7636@end example
69da35b5
NC
7637
7638This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7639perfectly legal
7640
7641@example
7642bin/
7643 cygxxx-5.dll
7644lib/
c0065db7 7645 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7646@end example
7647
dc8465bf 7648Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7649even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7650@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7651
7652Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7653wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7654
76551. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7656work with auto-imported data.
7657
dc8465bf
NC
76582. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7659import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7660symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7661for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7662possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7663
45e948fe
NC
76643. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7665critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7666in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7667stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7668
69da35b5 7669So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7670true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7671a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7672binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7673massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7674requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7675will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7676
c0065db7 7677@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7678@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7679@item adding additional names
7680Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7681A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7682exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7683when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7684import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7685
c0065db7 7686@example
dc8465bf
NC
7687LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7688
7689EXPORTS
c0065db7 7690foo
dc8465bf 7691_foo = foo
c0065db7 7692@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7693
7694The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7695
7696Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7697source code using the "weak" attribute:
7698
c0065db7
RM
7699@example
7700void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7701void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7702@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7703
7704See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7705symbols.
7706
7707@item renaming symbols
7708Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7709kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7710@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7711DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7712created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7713
c0065db7 7714@example
dc8465bf
NC
7715LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7716
7717EXPORTS
7718_foo = foo
c0065db7 7719@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7720
7721The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7722@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7723@end table
dc8465bf 7724
0a5d968e 7725Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7726unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7727If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7728@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7729that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7730@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7731renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7732to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7733the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7734In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7735which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7736
7737@cindex weak externals
7738@item weak externals
7739The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7740weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7741defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7742are three variants of weak externals:
7743@itemize
7744@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7745called lazy externals.
7746@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7747This form is not presently implemented.
7748@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7749implemented.
7750@end itemize
7751As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7752are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7753uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7754
7755@cindex aligned common symbols
7756@item aligned common symbols
7757As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7758desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7759the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7760carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7761by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7762tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7763but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7764warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7765
2ca22b03
NC
7766@end table
7767
7768@ifclear GENERIC
7769@lowersections
7770@end ifclear
7771@end ifset
7772
e0001a05
NC
7773@ifset XTENSA
7774@ifclear GENERIC
7775@raisesections
7776@end ifclear
7777
7778@node Xtensa
7779@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7780
7781@cindex Xtensa processors
7782The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7783@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7784specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7785keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7786example, with the command:
7787
7788@smallexample
7789SECTIONS
7790@{
7791 .text : @{
7792 *(.literal .text)
7793 @}
7794@}
7795@end smallexample
7796
7797@noindent
7798@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7799and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7800literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7801interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7802group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7803files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7804and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7805
43cd72b9 7806@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7807@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7808Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7809provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7810is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7811literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7812will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7813location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7814the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7815unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7816@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7817range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7818
7819For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7820to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7821instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7822instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7823instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7824@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7825hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7826By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7827switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7828density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7829instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7830performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7831linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7832a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7833
7834The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7835control the linker:
7836
7837@cindex Xtensa options
7838@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7839@item --size-opt
7840When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7841more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7842no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7843alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7844preserve the correctness of the code.
7845@end table
e0001a05
NC
7846
7847@ifclear GENERIC
7848@lowersections
7849@end ifclear
7850@end ifset
7851
252b5132
RH
7852@ifclear SingleFormat
7853@node BFD
7854@chapter BFD
7855
7856@cindex back end
7857@cindex object file management
7858@cindex object formats available
7859@kindex objdump -i
7860The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7861These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7862object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7863format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7864it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7865associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7866object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7867(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7868list all the formats available for your configuration.
7869
7870@cindex BFD requirements
7871@cindex requirements for BFD
7872As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7873several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7874BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7875formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7876been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7877BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7878may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7879
7880One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7881mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7882useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7883conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7884
7885@menu
7886* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7887@end menu
7888
7889@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7890@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7891@cindex opening object files
7892@include bfdsumm.texi
7893@end ifclear
7894
7895@node Reporting Bugs
7896@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7897@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7898@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7899
ff5dcc92 7900Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7901
7902Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7903it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7904to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7905work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7906@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7907
7908In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7909information that enables us to fix the bug.
7910
7911@menu
7912* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7913* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7914@end menu
7915
7916@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7917@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7918@cindex bug criteria
7919
7920If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7921
7922@itemize @bullet
7923@cindex fatal signal
7924@cindex linker crash
7925@cindex crash of linker
7926@item
7927If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7928@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7929
7930@cindex error on valid input
7931@item
ff5dcc92 7932If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7933
7934@cindex invalid input
7935@item
ff5dcc92 7936If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7937may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7938object files are correct.
7939
7940@item
7941If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7942improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7943@end itemize
7944
7945@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7946@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7947@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7948@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7949
7950A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7951products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7952recommend you contact that organization first.
7953
7954You can find contact information for many support companies and
7955individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7956distribution.
7957
ad22bfe8 7958@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7959Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7960@value{BUGURL}.
7961@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7962
7963The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7964@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7965fact or leave it out, state it!
7966
7967Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7968problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7969assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7970matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7971the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7972location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7973were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7974into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7975specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7976and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7977
7978Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7979the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7980on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7981
7982Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7983bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7984respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7985You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7986
7987To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7988
7989@itemize @bullet
7990@item
ff5dcc92 7991The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7992the @samp{--version} argument.
7993
7994Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7995the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7996
7997@item
ff5dcc92 7998Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7999patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8000
8001@item
8002The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8003version number.
8004
8005@item
ff5dcc92 8006What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8007``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8008
8009@item
8010The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8011observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8012list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8013sufficient.
8014
8015If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8016and then we might not encounter the bug.
8017
8018@item
8019A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8020bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8021provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8022bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8023state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8024requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8025we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8026attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8027
8028If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8029@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8030object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8031@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8032how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8033
8034@item
8035A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8036incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8037
ff5dcc92 8038Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8039will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8040not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8041a chance to make a mistake.
8042
8043Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8044say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8045copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8046C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8047and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8048fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8049you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8050any conclusion from our observations.
8051
8052@item
ff5dcc92 8053If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8054diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8055@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8056If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8057context, not by line number.
8058
8059The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8060sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8061@end itemize
8062
8063Here are some things that are not necessary:
8064
8065@itemize @bullet
8066@item
8067A description of the envelope of the bug.
8068
8069Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8070which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8071changes will not affect it.
8072
8073This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8074will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8075with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8076We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8077
8078Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8079of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8080output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8081less time, and so on.
8082
8083However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8084report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8085
8086@item
8087A patch for the bug.
8088
8089A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8090the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8091a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8092to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8093
ff5dcc92 8094Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8095construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8096through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8097able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8098fixed.
8099
8100And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8101patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8102help us to understand.
8103
8104@item
8105A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8106
8107Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8108things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8109@end itemize
8110
8111@node MRI
8112@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8113@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8114To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8115linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8116alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8117described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8118simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8119@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8120linker commands; these commands are described here.
8121
8122In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8123file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8124features to make use of them.
8125
8126You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8127@samp{-c} command-line option.
8128
8129Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8130command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8131blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8132MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8133issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8134
8135Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8136
8137You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8138lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8139The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8140
8141@table @code
8142@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8143@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8144@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8145Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8146the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8147@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8148your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8149script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8150commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8151input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8152@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8153
8154@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8155@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8156Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8157in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8158
8159@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8160
8161@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8162@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8163Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8164@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8165
8166@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8167@item BASE @var{expression}
8168Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8169absolute addresses) in the output file.
8170
8171@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8172@item CHIP @var{expression}
8173@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8174This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8175
8176@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8177@item END
8178This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8179
8180@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8181@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8182Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8183language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8184
8185@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8186@item
252b5132
RH
8187S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8188
8189@item
8190IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8191
8192@item
8193COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8194@samp{COFF}
8195@end enumerate
8196
8197@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8198@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8199Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8200@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8201
8202The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8203same line, with no change in its effect.
8204
8205@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8206@item LOAD @var{filename}
8207@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8208Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8209same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8210command line.
8211
8212@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8213@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8214@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8215MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8216option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8217
8218@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8219@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8220@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8221Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8222order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8223script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8224sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8225file, in the order specified.
8226
8227@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8228@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8229@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8230@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8231Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8232@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8233
8234@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8235@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8236@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8237@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8238You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8239specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8240If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8241@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8242@end table
8243
793c5807
NC
8244@node GNU Free Documentation License
8245@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8246@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8247
370b66a1
CD
8248@node LD Index
8249@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8250
8251@printindex cp
8252
8253@tex
7ca01ed9 8254% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8255% meantime:
8256\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8257\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8258\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8259\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8260\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8261\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8262\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8263\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8264\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8265% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8266@end tex
8267
252b5132 8268@bye